JVC GY HM790CHU User Manual

HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GY-HM790U  
GY-HM790CHU  
GY-HM790E  
GY-HM790CHE  
* The illustration shows the GY-HM790E with the supplied viewfinder, microphone and lens attached.  
* GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790CHE does not come with a lens.  
Please read the following before getting started:  
For Customer Use:  
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the body.  
Retain this information for future reference.  
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.  
Before operating this unit, please read the instructions  
carefully to ensure the best possible performance.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GY-HM790U/GY-HM790CHU  
In this manual, each model number is described without the last letter  
(U/E) which means the shipping destination. (U: for USA and Canada,  
E: for Europe)  
Only “U”models (GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U) have been evaluated by  
UL.  
LST1108-001A  
POUR CANADA  
Safety Precautions  
ATTENTION  
RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION NE  
PAS OUVRIR  
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE D’ELECTROCUTION  
NE PAS OUVRIR LE BOITER.  
FOR USA AND CANADA  
CAUTION  
AUCUNE PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A REGLER  
PAR LUTILISATEUR.  
SE REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE EN CAS DE  
PROBLEME.  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
Le symbole de l’éclair àl’intérieur d’un triangle  
équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur sur la  
présence d’une “tension dangereuse” non isolée  
dans le boîtier du produit. Cette tension est  
suffisante pour provoquer l’électrocution de  
personnes.  
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER  
(OR BACK).  
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.  
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Le point d’exclamation àl’intérieur d’un triangle  
équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur sur la  
présence d’opérations d’entretien importantes au  
sujet desquelles des renseignements se trouvent  
dans le manuel d’instructions.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,  
within an equilateral triangle is intended to  
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated  
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s  
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude  
to constitute a risk of electric shock to  
persons.  
Ces symboles ne sont utilisésqu’aux Etats-Unis.  
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)  
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la Class A est conforme à la  
norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
INFORMATION:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a  
commercial environment.  
WARNING:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN  
OR MOISTURE.  
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications.  
CAUTION:  
This unit should be used with 12V DC only.  
To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT use any  
other power source.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct  
the interference at his own expense.  
AVERTISSEMENT:  
POUR EVITER LES RISQUES  
D’INCENDIE OU D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS  
EXPOSER LAPPAREIL A LHUMIDITE OU A LA  
PLUIE.  
CAUTION:  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC  
COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE  
EQUIPMENT.  
ATTENTION:  
Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du courant  
direct en 12V.  
Afin d’eviter tout resque d’incendie ou d’electrocution, ne  
pas utillser d’autres sources d’alimentation électrique.  
NOTE:  
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC  
RULES.  
The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the unit.  
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO  
CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE  
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST  
ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING  
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED  
OPERATION.  
REMARQUE:  
La plaque signalétique (plaque du numéro desérie) est située sur  
le cadre inférieur de l’unité.  
CAUTION:  
To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user  
serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service  
personnel.  
Due to design modifications, data given in this instruction book  
are subject to possible change without prior notice.  
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and  
that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed  
close to the apparatus.  
III  
 
Information for Users on Disposal of Old Equipment  
[European Union]  
FOR EUROPE  
This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and  
protection requirements of the corresponding European  
Directives. This equipment is designed for professional video  
appliances and can be used in the following environments:  
Attention:  
This symbol is only valid in the European  
Union.  
Controlled EMC environment (for example, purpose-built  
broad-casting or recording studio), and rural outdoors  
environments.  
This symbol indicates that the electrical and electronic  
equipment should not be disposed as general household  
waste at its end-of-life. Instead, the product should be handed  
over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of  
electrical and electronic equipment for proper treatment,  
recovery and recycling in accordance with your national  
legislation.  
By disposing of this product correctly, you will help to conserve  
natural resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health which could  
otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this  
product. For more information about collection point and  
recycling of this product, please contact your local municipal  
office, your household waste disposal service or the shop  
where you purchased the product. Penalties may be applicable  
for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national  
legislation.  
In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for  
electromagnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables  
not exceeding the following lengths:  
Port  
Cable  
Length  
5 m  
[DC INPUT]  
Exclusive Cable  
Coaxial Cable  
Shielded Cable  
Shielded Cable  
Exclusive Cable  
Exclusive Cable  
Coaxial Cable  
Exclusive Cable  
Unshielded Cable  
Special Cable  
Shielded Cable  
Shielded Cable  
Shielded Cable  
Shielded Cable  
Exclusive Cable  
[Y/VIDEO], [PB], [PR]  
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2]  
[AUDIO OUTPUT]  
[PHONES]  
10 m  
3 m  
10 m  
3 m  
[IEEE1394]  
[HD/SD-SDI]  
[REMOTE]  
3 m  
10 m  
5 m  
(Business users)  
If you wish to dispose of this product, please visit our web  
page http://www.jvc.eu to obtain information about the take-  
back of the product.  
[LENS]  
0.1 m  
0.3 m  
2 m  
[VF]  
[USB]  
[Other Countries outside the European Union]  
If you wish to dispose of this product, please do so in  
accordance with applicable national legislation or other rules  
in your country for the treatment of old electrical and  
electronic equipment.  
[GENLOCK INPUT]  
[TC IN]  
10 m  
10 m  
10 m  
0.3 m  
[TC OUT]  
[STUDIO]  
Caution:  
Where there are strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism, for  
example near a radio or TV transmitter, transformer, motor, etc.,  
the picture and the sound may be disturbed. In such case, please  
keep the apparatus away from the sources of the disturbance.  
Dear Customer,  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European directives and  
standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited is:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,  
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien und  
Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit und  
elektrischer Sicherheit überein.  
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited ist:  
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 04  
61145 Friedberg  
Deutschland  
IV  
V
Contents  
Auto White Display (Camera Mode Only,  
Recording Time Code in Continuation of  
Synchronizing Time Code with External Time Code  
2
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
How to use this manual  
Symbols used  
Describes precautions concerning the  
operation of this product.  
Note  
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items  
Describes reference information, such as  
functions and usage restrictions of this  
product.  
Memo  
A
Indicates the reference page numbers and  
reference items.  
Content of this manual  
All rights reserved by JVC. Unauthorized duplication or  
reprinting of this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly  
prohibited.  
All other product names used in this manual are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  
companies. Marks such as , , have been omitted in  
this manual.  
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only,  
Illustrated designs, specifications and other contents of  
this manual are subject to change for improvement  
without prior notice.  
Reproduction of Dark Areas (Black Stretch/Compress  
3
Main Features  
Adoption of MPEG-2 Long GOP for Easy  
Editing  
Shortens editing and output time by adopting MPEG-2  
codec, which puts less stress on the editing computer.  
This camera recorder enables recording of HD/SD format  
images to an SDHC card, and also playback of these  
images.  
High Resolution via Triplex Offset  
2.5k x 1.4k pixels are generated with the Triplex Offset, and a  
high resolution of more than 900 horizontal lines and 1000  
diagonal lines is achieved using the proprietary front  
processing.  
[GENLOCK INPUT], [TC IN], [TC OUT]  
Terminals and Return Video Function  
Equipped with a function that enables use of multiple  
cameras as well as use as a studio camera.  
Spot Meter Function  
The brightest and darkest positions on the screen are  
automatically detected and displayed together with the  
dynamic range. As this is a pre-gamma value, it allows you to  
understand the lighting ratio and prevents overexposure or  
underexposure in shooting scenes where lighting is  
controlled.  
SD (Standard Definition) Recording  
Supports DV compression of SD images and recording in the  
QuickTime or AVI file format.  
The use of a wide array of non-linear editing software is also  
supported, which helps to ease production of SD videos,  
such as DVDs.  
High Resolution Viewfinder  
With a high resolution of 852 x 480 in 0.425 inches, the  
viewfinder is now more robust and enables more accurate  
focusing.  
Recording in QuickTime File Format  
Recording can be made in QuickTime file format of Final Cut  
Pro, a video editing software from Apple Inc.  
You can edit the recorded clips directly with Final Cut Pro.  
High Resolution LCD Monitor  
Equipped with a 4.3 inch 800x480 large LCD monitor, both  
shooting precision and viewing performance are improved.  
Recording in MP4 File Format  
This camera supports recording in the MP4 file format for  
Windows NLE systems, which can be utilized in a wide range  
of non-linear editing environments.  
Intuitive User Interface  
The sophisticated user interface allows more intuitive  
operations. Thumbnail display is also available for you to  
easily select a recorded clip for playback.  
Recording on SDHC Memory Card (Class  
6/10)  
The absence of mechanisms with the use of SDHC (Class  
6/10) as recording media brings about increased operation  
reliability. In addition, the improved compatibility with  
computers enables high-speed data transfer to NLE as well  
as reduction of operating costs.  
Compact Shoulder Style  
By inheriting the compact shoulder style from the GY-HD100  
series which is widely accepted in the industry, more stable  
shooting can be done on this camera recorder while its weight  
remains similar to that of a handheld camera recorder.  
35 Mbps High Image Quality Mode  
This camera recorder is equipped with a 35 Mbps high quality  
mode, in addition to the HDV mode bit rate (19/25 Mbps).  
Lens Interchangeability  
Existing lenses can be used, thus saving on costs. You can  
also select the most appropriate lens according to your  
shooting requirements.  
Dual Media Slots  
Continuous recording is possible by loading two recording  
media, thereby allowing a long recording time.  
Professional Batteries  
Batteries such as Anton Bauer and IDX batteries that are  
used in the broadcast industry can be used with this camera  
recorder.  
Wide Variety of Recording Formats  
This camera recorder supports various HD formats (1080i,  
1080p, 720p) as well as SD (DV) formats (480i : U model,  
576i : E model), enabling it to be used under various  
environments. It also supports 1440x1080 and 1920x1080  
full resolution in the 1080 format.  
Support for Wide Variety of Output  
Supports industrial output such as HD-SDI output and  
IEEE1394 output.  
4
 
Precautions for Proper Use  
Application Software Provided  
The [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] application software is  
provided for you to copy recorded clips to Windows or  
Macintosh computers and for checking the video images.  
(For MP4 file format)  
The CD-ROM provided with this camera recorder  
comes with [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] and other  
application software as well as their user guides.  
Storage and Usage Locations  
Allowable ambient temperature and humidity  
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable temperature range of  
* For details, refer to the user guides for each application  
software.  
0
f
to 40  
f
and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %. Using this  
unit at a temperature or humidity outside the allowable ranges could  
result not only in malfunction but also serious impact on the CCD  
elements as small white spots may be generated. Please exercise  
care during use.  
Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism  
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the colors may be  
incorrect if this unit is used near a radio or television transmitting  
antenna, in places where strong magnetic fields are generated by  
transformers, motors, etc., or near devices emitting radio waves,  
such as transceivers or cellular phones.  
Use of wireless microphone near this unit  
When a wireless microphone or wireless microphone tuner is used  
near this unit during recording, the tuner could pick up noise.  
Avoid using or placing this unit in the following places.  
Places subject to extreme heat or cold  
Places with excessive dirt or dust  
Places with high humidity or moisture  
Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near a  
cooking stove  
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable surfaces  
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a heater for  
long hours.  
Do not place this unit at places that are subject to  
radiation or X-rays, or where corrosive gases occur.  
Protect this unit from being splashed with water.  
(Especially when shooting in the rain)  
Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting on a  
beach. In addition, salt and sand may adhere to the body.  
Be sure to clean the unit after use.  
Protect this unit against penetration of dust when using it  
in a place subject to sandy dust.  
Transportation  
Do not drop or hit this unit against a hard object when  
transporting.  
Power Saving  
to  
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the [POWER] switch  
OFF in order to reduce power consumption.  
A
B
5
 
Others  
Do not insert objects other than the memory card into the  
card slot.  
Do not block the vent on the unit.  
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and may lead to  
burns and fires.  
Maintenance  
Do not turn off the [POWER] switch or remove the power  
Turn off the power before performing any maintenance.  
cable during recording or playback.  
Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft cloth. Do not  
The camera recorder may not show stable pictures for a  
few seconds immediately after the power is turned on, but  
this is not a malfunction.  
wipe the body with benzene or thinner. Doing so may cause the  
surface to melt or turn cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak the  
cloth in a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the body with it, and  
then use a clean cloth to remove the detergent.  
When the video signal output terminals are not in use, put  
on the covers to prevent damage to the terminals.  
Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact or  
vibration as it is a precision equipment.  
Batteries  
Optical performance of lens  
The following batteries can be used on this unit.  
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color divergence  
phenomena (magnification chromatic aberration) may occur  
at the periphery of the image. This is not a camera  
malfunction.  
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U : Dionic90 (Anton Bauer)  
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E : Endura-HL9 (IDX)  
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and  
the UL Listing mark is not applicable.  
Make use of the recommended batteries. Heavy batteries  
may fall off if not used correctly.  
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder  
The LCD monitor and viewfinder screens are  
manufactured using high-precision technology. Black spots  
may appear on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens, or  
red, blue, and/or white spots may not disappear. However,  
this is not a malfunction and these spots are not recorded on  
the SDHC card.  
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)  
Under normal environment, dust will accumulate on the  
camera recorder when it is used over a long period. Dust  
may enter the camera recorder especially if it is used  
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound quality of the  
camera recorder. Check and replace the fan after every 9000  
hours (suggested guideline).  
You can check the usage time of the fan in the [Others]  
menu B [System Information] B [Fan Hour]. (A Page 95)  
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours without  
replacement, AFAN MAINTENANCE REQUIREDB will be  
displayed every time you turn on the power.  
If you use this unit continuously for a long period of time,  
the characters displayed in the viewfinder may temporarily  
remain on the screen. This is not recorded on the SDHC  
card. They will not appear after you turn the power off and  
then on again.  
If you use this unit in a cold place, the images may appear  
to lag on the screen, but this is not a malfunction. Retained  
images are not recorded on the SDHC card.  
Do not press against the surface with force or subject it to  
strong impact. Doing so may damage or break the screens.  
SDHC Cards  
Use an SDHC card (4 GB to 32 GB) with Class 6 or higher  
performance.  
Using cards other than those from Panasonic, TOSHIBA or  
SanDisk may result in recording failure or data loss.  
Noise may appear in the viewfinder when switching  
between the live video and playback images.  
Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder display device,  
colors may appear on the images when you blink your eyes.  
This is not a malfunction. It does not affect the recorded  
images, SDI output, or component output.  
6
Handling of SDHC Cards  
Characteristic CCD Phenomena  
The access lamp lights up in red when data on the SDHC  
card is being accessed. Do not remove the SDHC card  
during data access (such as recording, playback, or  
formatting). Do not turn off the power or remove the battery  
and AC adapter during access either.  
Smear and blooming  
Due to the physical structure of CCDs, vertical streaking  
(called “smear”) may occur when shooting an extremely  
bright light source or expansion of light (called “blooming”)  
may appear around it. Although the CCD employed in this  
unit produces very little smear or blooming, these  
phenomena may still occur when shooting a bright light  
source.  
Do not use or store the SDHC card in a place that is  
subject to static electricity or electrical noise.  
Do not place the SDHC card near locations that are  
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio waves.  
Smear  
Vertical pale streaking appearing at  
high luminous object  
Inserting the SDHC card incorrectly may result in damage  
of this unit or the SDHC card.  
High luminous object (such as light  
bulbs, sun)  
We are not liable for any accidental loss of data stored on  
the SDHC card. Please back up any important data.  
Blooming  
Make use of the SDHC card within the prescribed  
conditions of use.  
Blurring in highlight  
Monitor Screen  
Do not use it at the following locations.  
Moire or aliasing  
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high humidity or  
corrosion, places near thermal equipment, sandy or dusty  
places, or in a car under the sun with the doors and windows  
closed.  
Stripes, lines or other fine patterns may appear jagged when  
they are shot.  
White dots  
High temperatures can cause CCD sensor pixels to produce  
white dots in the image. This is especially prominent when  
boosting the sensitivity.  
Do not bend or drop the SDHC card, or subject it to strong  
impact or vibration.  
When formatting or erasing data using the camera  
recorder, only the file administration information is changed.  
The data is not completely erased from the SDHC card. If  
you want to completely erase all of the data, we recommend  
either using commercially available software that is specially  
designed for that purpose, or by physically destroying the  
SDHC card with a hammer, etc.  
This is a characteristic of the charged-coupled device (CCD).  
As far as possible, use this unit under conditions where the  
temperature of this unit does not increase.  
Copyright  
Any recordings made on this camera recorder that are  
played back for profit or public preview may infringe on the  
rights of the owner of the recordings.  
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than personal  
enjoyment without prior consent from the owner.  
Do not dismantle or modify the SDHC card.  
Do not touch the terminals with your hands or with a metal  
object.  
Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects to adhere  
to the terminals.  
Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or stickers  
on the SDHC cards.  
Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on the SDHC  
cards. Always use oil-based pens.  
If you format (initialize) the SDHC card, all data recorded  
on the card, including video data and setup files, will be  
deleted.  
You are recommended to use cards that are formatted  
(initialized) on this camera recorder.  
The SDHC card may be damaged if the camera recorder is  
not operated correctly. Formatting (Initializing) the SDHC  
card may allow it to operate correctly.  
SDHC cards that have been formatted (initialized) on other  
cameras, computers or peripheral equipment may not  
operate correctly. In this case, format (initialize) the SDHC  
card on this camera recorder.  
7
Operation Mode  
This camera recorder has three operation modes - Camera mode, Media mode, and USB mode.  
The operation mode indicator on the left side of the camera recorder lights up according to the mode. The AUX mode is only  
available on GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U.  
Media Mode  
Camera Mode  
Camera Mode  
[CAM/MEDIA] Selection Button  
IEEE1394  
Mode  
[CAM/MEDIA] Selection Button  
[GENLOCK/AUX]  
Selection Switch  
[CAM/MEDIA]  
Selection  
Button  
SD Card Mode  
Playback Button  
Playback  
(Playback/Pause/Fast Forward/  
Rewind/Clip Jump)  
Thumbnail Display  
AUX Mode  
(U model only)  
Stop Button  
USB Connection (When the confirmation to change to USB mode  
appears and [Change] is selected)  
Connection disabled on PC  
USB Mode  
(USB Mass Storage Class)  
[CAM/MEDIA] Button  
Operation Mode Indicator  
Stop Button  
Playback Button  
8
 
Operation  
Mode  
Operation Mode  
Description  
Indicator  
Camera Camera  
Blue  
This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode when  
the power is turned on.  
Mode  
Mode  
Memo :  
Images recorded on the SDHC card cannot be played back in this mode. However, you  
can check (play back) the most recently recorded image using the Clip Review function.  
Purple When [Rec Mode] is set to AVariable FrameB, the operation mode indicator lights up in  
purple during Variable Frame REC in Camera mode. (A Page 60)  
AUX Mode  
(U model)  
Blue  
This is a mode for input and recording of composite video signals from an external device.  
Media  
Mode  
SD Card  
Mode  
Green  
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SDHC card.  
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button to enter SD Card mode when you are not  
shooting in Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in SD Card mode, thumbnails of  
the selected media slot are displayed.  
IEEE1394  
Mode  
Orange This is the input mode for video images from the IEEE1394-connected equipment.  
The camera recorder enters IEEE1394 mode when you press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection  
button while the power of the equipment connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal is turned on  
during thumbnail display in Media mode (SD Card mode). (Only for HD video systems)  
When an SD video system is in use, availability of the [IEEE1394] terminal connection  
cannot be detected in Media mode (SD Card mode). Allow the camera recorder to detect  
the [IEEE1394] terminal connection in advance by turning on the power of the connected  
equipment in Camera mode.  
Once the camera recorder is in IEEE1394 mode, the playback images of the connected  
equipment are displayed.  
However, if the IEEE1394 connection is not recognized (such as when the power of the  
IEEE1394-connected equipment is not turned on), the camera recorder will switch to  
Camera mode instead.  
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button during IEEE1394 mode to switch to Camera  
mode.  
If the power of the equipment connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal is OFF or if connection  
is canceled in IEEE1394 mode, the camera recorder will not automatically switch to other  
modes. To quit IEEE1394 mode, you must operate the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button.  
Note :  
This mode is used for viewing images input to the [IEEE1394] terminal from an external  
device, and not intended for recording input images on the camera recorder.  
USB Mode  
Orange This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SDHC card to the PC.  
When the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message AChange to USB  
ModeB appears. Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.  
In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a peripheral  
drive (USB mass storage class only). Disable the connection on the PC and remove the  
USB cable from the camera recorder to switch to Camera mode. (A Page 130)  
Memo :  
When a USB cable is connected, the message appears after recording stops.  
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed automatically,  
such as when playback stops.  
9
Names of Parts  
N
M L  
K
J
A
B
F G H I  
LCD Monitor (A Page 13)  
Side Control Panel (A Page 12)  
C D E  
A
B
C
Front Tally Lamp (  
Viewfinder Cable Clamp (  
[ZEBRA ON/OFF] Zebra ON/OFF Switch (  
J
K
Monitor Speaker (Cheek Pad) (  
Shoe  
For mounting separately sold lights and accessories.  
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] Skin Area/Spot Meter Switch  
L
M
N
Microphone Holder Lock Knob (  
Microphone Holder ( Page 21)  
D
[AWB] Auto White Balance Button (  
Setting the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch (A Page 12) I  
on the control panel on the right side of the camera  
recorder to AAB or ABB starts up the Auto White function.  
If the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch (A Page 12) I is set  
to APRESETB, you can switch the color temperature of the  
preset white balance.  
E
F
Lens Lock Lever (  
[MONITOR SELECT] Audio Monitor Selection Switch  
G
H
[DISPLAY] Display Button (  
[CAM/MEDIA] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button  
I
[FULL AUTO] Full Auto Shooting (FAS) Switch  
10  
 
a
Z Y X  
W
W
V
O
P
Battery Adapter  
SDHC Slot  
Q
R
S
T
U
O
P
Q
Back Tally Lamp (  
X
Y
[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus Assist Button (  
Record Button Lock Switch  
[PHONES] Earphone Connector (  
Φ3.5) (A  
Set the switch toward the lens to lock the [REC] trigger  
button Z.  
[LENS] Lens Connector (12-pin Connector)  
Memo :  
The [REC] trigger button (  
K
at the side control  
R [INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2  
(XLR 3-pin 
ן
 2) (A Page 46)  
panel on the right of the camera recorder is not locked.  
S
T
Microphone Cable Clamp (  
Z
[REC] Rec Trigger Button (Recording Start/Stop)  
[CH-2 INPUT] CH-2 Audio Input Terminal Selection  
Starts/stops recording.  
Switch  
Memo :  
The [REC] trigger button (  
K
at the side control  
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH-2. (  
panel on the right of the camera recorder is interlocked with  
this button.  
Memo :  
Audio from [INPUT1] terminal is input to CH-1 regardless of the  
setting.  
a Handle  
U
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2] Audio Input Signal Selection  
Switch (A  
Viewfinder Connector (20-pin) (  
Accessory Mounting Screw Hole (x2)  
V
W
11  
 
Memo :  
Set the functions of the [USER1,USER2,USER3] buttons in  
the menu. ( Page 79)  
When the menu screen is displayed, these buttons function  
as the menu operation buttons.  
E
F
[MENU] Menu Button (  
[ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch (  
[STATUS] Status Screen Display Button  
Side Control Panel  
A
B
G
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status screen on  
the viewfinder and LCD monitor during normal screen  
display (when the menu screen is not displayed).  
P
O
N
C
D
Switches between [Main Menu] and [Favorites Menu] when  
the [STATUS] button is pressed while the menu screen is  
E
F
G
displayed. (  
[GAIN] Sensitivity Selection Switch (  
[WHT.BAL.] White Balance Selection Switch (  
M
H
I
H
I
J
L
K
You can select one of the three white balance types.  
J
[POWER] Power ON/OFF Switch  
Turns ON/OFF the power.  
When the power is OFF, APOFFB appears on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder.  
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the power again.  
A
[VF BRIGHT] Viewfinder Luminance Adjustment Knob  
B
[VF PEAKING] Contour Adjustment Knob (  
K
[REC] Rec Trigger Button (Recording Start/Stop)  
Memo :  
Starts/stops recording.  
This knob does not function when Focus Assist is activated.  
The [REC] trigger button (A Page 11) Z on top and the  
[REC] trigger button (A Page 16) of the lens are interlocked  
with this button.  
Memo :  
C
[FOCUS ASSIST] Focus Assist Button  
When [1394 Rec Trigger] in the [Others] menu is set to  
Press this button during shooting to display the focus area in  
either blue, red, or green. This enables easy and accurate  
A
Split  
of the external equipment. (  
B
, this button becomes the recording start/stop button  
D
[USER1], [USER2], [USER3] User Buttons (  
Use these buttons to switch shooting conditions according to  
the object. The functions change as below according to the  
operation mode (A Page 8).  
L
[AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]/[AUTO] CH-1/CH-2  
Recording Level Adjustment Knob/Auto Indicator  
During Camera mode  
During Media mode  
(Except AUX mode)  
M
[CANCEL] Cancel Button  
Cancels various settings and stops playback.  
Cross-Shaped Button (JKH I)/Set Button (R  
[USER1]  
Button  
Activates the function assigned to Adds/deletes OK  
[USER1] in the menu.  
mark.  
N
)
Loads the [TC Preset] screen  
when pressed together with the  
The function changes according to the operation status of  
the camera recorder.  
[MENU] button. (  
During menu operation (all modes) (A Page 70)  
[USER2]  
Button  
Activates the function assigned to Deletes clips  
[USER2] in the menu.  
Center Set button (R  
)
: Confirms menu items and setting  
values  
Resets settings on the [TC Preset]/  
[UB Preset] screen when pressed.  
Cross-Shaped Button (JK) : Selects menu items and setting  
values  
[USER3]  
Button  
Activates the function assigned to  
[USER3] in the menu.  
^
During Camera mode (Except AUX mode)  
Shutter operation:  
Center Set button (R  
)
: Shutter ON/OFF  
Cross-Shaped Button (JK) : Switches shutter speed when shutter  
is ON  
AE level operation  
: Cross-shaped button (H I)  
12  
     
Memo :  
LCD Monitor  
When [Camera Function] menu B [Switch Set] B  
[AE LEVEL] is set to AAE LEVEL/VFRB, the cross-shaped  
button (H I) is used to set the number of frames during  
Variable Frame Rec.  
During Media mode (SD Card mode) (A Page 61)  
Thumbnail operation : Cross-shaped button (JKH I), center  
A
Set button (R)  
O
Operation Mode Indicator  
Lights up as below according to the operation mode.  
When the LCD monitor is open  
B
C
Operation Mode  
Camera Mode (Except AUX mode)  
AUX Mode (U model only)  
Media Mode (SD Card Mode)  
Media Mode (IEEE1394 Mode)  
USB Mode  
Color  
Blue/Purple  
Blue  
Green  
Orange  
Orange  
D
Memo :  
E
F
G
You can select whether to light up the indicator using  
[Mode LED] in the [Others] menu. (A Page 94)  
B
[LCD PEAKING +/-] LCD Contour Adjustment Button  
P
[MONITOR] Audio Monitor Level Adjustment Knob  
For adjusting the volume of the monitor speaker and earphones.  
C
[LCD BRIGHT +/-] LCD Display Brightness  
Viewfinder  
D [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] Audio Recording Mode  
E
F
G
[TC DISPLAY] TC/UB Display Switch (  
[TC GENE.] Time Code Generator Switch (  
A
B
C
D
E
A Viewfinder Slide Lock Ring  
For loosening the ring and adjusting the position of the  
viewfinder E to the left or right.  
B
Eyepiece Focus Ring  
For adjusting the visibility.  
Viewfinder Eyepiece Lock Ring  
C
For loosening the ring and adjusting the eyepiece position of  
the viewfinder to the front or back.  
D
Viewfinder  
E
Eyepiece  
Prevents external light from entering the viewfinder screen  
and cameraman’s vision.  
13  
   
H
[PR] PR Video Signal Output Terminal (BNC)  
I
[DC INPUT] DC Input Terminal (  
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. Connects with an  
AC adapter.  
J
[REMOTE] Remote Terminal (  
Side Terminal  
K
[HD/SD-SDI] HD/SD-SDI Output Terminal (BNC)  
B
A
L
[AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2] Audio Output Terminal  
(RCA)  
C
D
E
F
Output terminal for audio signals.  
Input audio signals are output during Camera mode.  
Playback audio signals are output during Media mode.  
Audio from input audio signals is output during HD/DV signal  
(IEEE1394) input.  
Q
P
G
Memo :  
Alarm tone is not output.  
M
[INT/EXT] IEEE1394 Interface Terminal Switch  
H I J K L  
M
N
O
For selecting a valid IEEE1394 interface terminal.  
A [Y/VIDEO] Y/Composite Video Signal Output  
[EXT]  
Enables IEEE1394 signals from the [IEEE1394]  
terminal Q.  
:
[INT]  
Enables the accessory connector B at the rear  
of the camera recorder. (A Page 15)  
B
[PB] PB Video Signal Output Terminal (BNC)  
:
N
Shoulder Pad Slide Button  
C [GENLOCK/AUX] Genlock/AUX Selection Switch  
(U model only) (A Page 125)  
For adjusting the shoulder pad position. Press this button to  
adjust the shoulder pad O position to the front or back.  
D
[GENLOCK/AUX IN] Genlock/AUX Input Terminal  
(U model)/[GENLOCK INPUT] Genlock Input Terminal  
(E model)  
O
P
Q
Shoulder Pad  
[USB] USB Terminal (  
U model : For input of external synchronizing signals or  
external composite video signals.  
[IEEE1394] IEEE1394 Terminal (4-pin)  
For connecting digital video equipment with IEEE1394  
terminal using an IEEE1394 cable (sold separately).  
To enable this terminal, set the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 terminal  
switch M to [EXT].  
E model : For input of external synchronizing signals.  
E [TC IN] Time Code Input Terminal (BNC)  
Note :  
When connecting IEEE1394 cables, check that the  
connectors are facing the right direction before you insert.  
F [TC OUT] Time Code Output Terminal (BNC)  
Memo :  
Put on the covers when the connectors are not in use.  
G [STUDIO] Studio Terminal (10-pin) (A Page 128)  
Connect to this terminal when combining the use of products,  
such as a transmission unit, from a different manufacturer.  
Input/  
Output  
Pin No.  
Signal  
1
2
NC  
^
CALL TALLY  
RM TALLY  
RM PREVIEW  
NC  
IN  
3
OUT  
OUT  
^
4
5
6
NC  
^
7
TALLY IN  
RETURN GND  
RETURN IN  
GND  
IN  
8
^
9
IN  
10  
^
14  
 
SD Slot  
Rear  
E
D
A
A
C
A
B
B
C
A Card Slot A Status Indicator  
[SLOT SELECT] Card Slot Selection Button  
For switching SDHC cards.  
A Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)  
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).  
B
Note :  
Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength to withstand  
the weight of this camera recorder.  
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the camera  
recorder may fall and cause injuries.  
Check the instruction manual provided with the shoulder belt  
before using.  
C
D
E
SDHC Card Cover  
Card Slot B Status Indicator  
[OPEN] SDHC Card Cover Open/Close Knob  
B
Accessory Connection Terminal  
Terminal for connecting a KA-MR100G (Memory Recorder :  
sold separately) or KA-M790G (Multicore Remote Adapter :  
sold separately) unit.  
Memo :  
When using this terminal, make sure that the Battery  
Adapter C is removed.  
C
Battery Adapter (  
The shape is different for GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U and  
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E.  
* The above is the illustration for GY-HM790CHE/GY-  
HM790E.  
15  
     
G
Zoom Servo Control Lever  
To operate zoom servo with the zoom servo control lever, set  
the [ZOOM] switch M to ASERVOB.  
Zooms into wide angle and increases the angle of view  
when is pressed.  
Zooms into telephoto and decreases the angle of view when  
is pressed.  
AWB  
ATB  
Zoom speed increases when the lever is pressed hard.  
Zoom Lens  
(Supplied with GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)  
H
Iris Mode Switch  
A
M
: Auto iris operation mode.  
: Manual iris operation mode.  
CANON KT14 x 4.4KRSJ  
C B  
A
I
Iris Momentary Button  
Press and hold this button to change to auto iris mode when  
the iris mode switch H is set at AMB.  
J
[I.G.] Iris Speed Adjustment Knob  
If the speed is set too fast, opening/closing of the iris  
becomes unstable and hunting may occur. Readjust the  
speed in this case.  
W
T
R E T  
A
M
I R I S  
R
E
C
K
Filter Built-In Screw  
A transparent or UV filter for lens protection can be installed  
inside the lens hood from the front. Filters for various effects  
can also be used.  
D E  
F G HI J  
Installable filter types  
When installed on the hood  
: 82 mm P0.75  
When installed on the lens body : 72 mm P0.75  
M
L
Zoom Servo Connector  
For connecting a zoom servo unit (sold separately).  
M
[ZOOM] Zoom Switch  
SERVO  
: Enables zooming with the zoom servo control  
lever G.  
O
RV  
SE  
ZOOM  
U.  
AN  
M
MANU.  
: Enables zooming with the zoom lever/ring B.  
K
L
M N O  
N
Back Focus Ring/Lock Screw  
Exclusive ring for adjusting the back focus. After adjusting,  
secure with a lock screw.  
A Focus Ring  
Zoom Lever/Ring  
B
To operate zoom with this lever, turn the [ZOOM] switch M  
and set it to AMANU.B.  
O
[M] Macro Focus Ring (for close-ups)  
Turn the ring in the direction of the arrow to take close-up  
shots of small objects.  
Normal focusing and zooming cannot be performed in macro  
mode.  
C
Iris Ring  
To operate auto iris, set the iris mode switch H to AAB.  
D
E
Lens Cable  
To take macro shots  
[REC] Record Trigger Button  
Set focus ring A to infinity (n).  
Starts/stops recording.  
[RET] Return Video Button  
Set zoom ring B to the maximum wide angle.  
Rotate this ring in the direction of the arrow to adjust  
focus on the object.  
F
Press this button to play back and check the latest clip,  
according to the settings under [Clip Review] of [Switch Set]  
in the [Camera Function] menu. (A Page 79)  
Note :  
As the back focus knob is located nearby, be careful not to  
mistake the two knobs.  
Do not forget to restore the macro ring to its original position  
after use. (  
Memo :  
When [LENS RET] of [Switch Set...] in the [Camera Function]  
menu is set to  
Focus Assist button. When it is set to  
video is displayed. ( Page 79)  
A
Focus Assist  
B
, this button functions as the  
A
Return , a return  
B
16  
   
Basic System Diagram  
Shoulder Belt  
SDI Cable  
BNC  
Component Cable  
BNC  
Monitor  
Composite Cable  
BNC  
Earphone  
Audio Cable  
RCA pin  
Focus Manual Unit  
HZ-FM13 (FUJINON)  
HZ-FM15 (CANON)  
Monitor  
External Recording  
Device  
Microphone  
IEEE1394 Cable  
4P-6P  
1/3 Zoom Lens  
Th13x3.5BRMU(FUJINON)  
For GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U  
VTR  
Anton Bauer  
Battery Charger  
16 mm PL Mount  
Film Lens adapter  
HZ-CA13U  
PL Mount  
Film Lens  
Anton Bauer  
Battery  
(Dionic90)  
1/3 Zoom Lens  
KT14x4.4KRSJ (CANON)  
(GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)  
BR-HD50U/E*  
Battery Adapter  
For GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E*  
Non-linear Editing  
System  
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U  
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E  
:
:
Gold Mount  
V Mount  
Zoom Servo Control  
HZ-ZS13B  
IDX  
IDX Battery  
(Endura)  
Battery Charger  
Standard Package  
Mount Converter  
(1/2 1/3):ACM-12  
XLR 4P  
B
1/2 Zoom Lens  
Tripod Base  
KA-551U  
AC  
AC Adapter  
Carrying Case  
Remote Control Unit  
RM-LP25U/RM-LP55U/  
RM-LP57U  
Mount Converter  
(2/3 B1/3): ACM-17  
Tripod  
2/3 Zoom Lens  
USB Cable  
SDHC Memory Card  
Non-linear Editing  
System  
SDHC Card Reader  
Memory Recorder  
KA-MR100G  
Headset  
(Beyerdynamic)  
Studio Viewfinder  
VF-HP790G  
Remote Control Unit  
RM-LP25U  
(Connection is possible only  
when RM-HP250AU/RM-  
HP250DE* is used.)  
Multicore Remote Adapter  
KA-M790G  
Monitor  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250  
MASTER BLACK IRIS  
POWER  
TALLY  
CALL  
FULL AUTO  
F1  
F3  
MENU/SHUTTER  
GAIN  
P
A
I
N
T
W
H
I
T
E
A
U
T
O
SHUTTER  
STEP  
HIGH  
W.BAL  
B
I
SHUTTER  
PUSH-ON  
VARIABLE  
PUSH-ON  
MID  
A
AUTO  
MANU  
BARS  
F2  
F4  
MENU  
LOW  
R
B
PRESET  
Studio Adapter  
KA-790G  
GAIN  
O
INTERCOM  
LEVEL  
DOWN  
UP  
DOWN  
UP  
CLOSE  
OPEN  
Remote Control Unit  
RM-P210U/E*/RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*  
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and the UL Listing mark is not applicable.  
17  
 
LCD monitor display  
Displays on the LCD  
Monitor and Viewfinder  
The display switches between the 5 screen types with every press  
of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0  
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
0)  
Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the enlarged status  
* The STATUS 0 screen is skipped in the AUX mode  
(U model only).  
You can display the camera status, media information, zebra  
pattern, and various markers in the video image on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screens during shooting.  
30/24 fps  
Besides camera and playback images, the following  
characters are displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
Status screen (A Page 18)  
Auto White display* (A Page 20)  
Alarm display (A Page 20)  
S.DTL  
B -3  
A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
STBY  
STATUS 0 Screen  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
24p HQ  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
Marker and safety zone indicators* (  
Zebra pattern display (A Page 20)  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
* Displayed in Camera mode only (Except AUX mode)  
S.DTL  
B -3  
Memo :  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
When [Analog Out Char.]/[SDI Out Char.] in the [A/V Out]  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
282min  
menu is set to  
also displayed in the video image of the video signal output  
AOnB, the status screen and menu screen are  
STATUS 1 Screen  
CAMERA INFORMATION  
SETUP FILE  
SCENE  
[ SCENE  
]
ZEBRA1  
ZEBRA2  
AUDIO  
50%~100%  
70%~80%  
CH1  
CH2  
FORMAT  
MEDIA  
QuickTime  
125min  
A
B
Viewfinder  
123min  
282min  
STBY  
Jan 2. 2009 01:23:45AM  
STATUS 2 Screen  
[DISPLAY]  
Button  
SWITCH ASSIGN  
NONE  
FAW  
GAIN [ L / M / H ] 0dB / 9dB / 12dB  
USER 1  
USER 2  
USER 3  
RET  
SKIN/SPOT  
AELEVEL  
BARS  
B.STRETCH3  
LOAD FILE  
CLIP REVIEW  
SPOT METER  
AE LEVEL/VFR  
[STATUS]  
Button  
Jan 2. 2009 01:23:45AM  
STBY  
282min  
STATUS 3 Screen  
LCD Monitor  
30/24 fps  
Status Screen  
This screen allows you to check the current settings.  
To display the status screen, press the [STATUS] button in  
the normal screen.  
The status display differs according to the operation mode  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
STBY  
STATUS 4 Screen  
Press [DISPLAY]  
Press [DISPLAY]  
Status Screen in Camera Mode  
CH1  
CH2  
Viewfinder display  
DF  
FREE  
The display switches between the 5 screen types with every press  
of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0  
B
1
B
2
B
3
B
4
B
0)  
1280 x 720  
24p HQ  
STBY  
min  
A
* The STATUS 0 screen is skipped in the AUX mode  
(U model only).  
282min  
100 min  
B
STATUS 1 Enlarged Display Screen (LCD monitor only)  
18  
   
Status Screen (VF/LCD) During Clip  
Playback in Media Mode (SD Card Mode)  
Status Screen in USB Mode  
This screen displays the USB mode.  
The display switches between the 3 screen types with every  
press of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0 B 1 B 2 B 0)  
Enlarged Status Display on LCD Monitor  
You can enlarge and display only the characters of the status  
screen on the LCD monitor. (Camera mode only)  
STATUS 0 Screen  
STATUS 1 Screen  
STATUS 2 Screen  
CH1  
CH2  
DF  
FREE  
1280 x 720  
24p HQ  
STBY  
A
min  
282min  
100 min  
B
[DISPLAY] Button  
Status Screen in Media Mode  
(IEEE1394 Mode) (A Page 109)  
The display switches between the 2 screen types with every  
press of the [STATUS] button. (STATUS 0 B 1 B 0)  
1 Set [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] menu to AOnB.  
2 Press the [DISPLAY] button while the LCD screen is  
displayed.  
The display switches between the same display as the  
viewfinder and the enlarged display with every press of the  
button.  
STATUS 0 Screen  
Memo :  
During enlarged display of the status on the LCD monitor  
screen, the video image remains displayed on the  
viewfinder.  
1280x720  
24p HQ  
282min  
STATUS 1 Screen  
19  
 
Alarm Display  
Alarm is displayed during the status screen display in  
Camera mode (STATUS 0, 1, 4) and Media mode. If the  
alarm sounds during STATUS 2 or 3 screen display in  
Camera mode, the display will return to STATUS 0 screen  
and alarm will be displayed.  
Auto White Display (Camera Mode Only,  
Excluding AUX Mode)  
Displays the operation and result when Auto White Balance is  
activated.  
30/24 fps  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
S.DTL  
B -3  
A<3200K>  
A
B
1min  
1min  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
STBY  
RES  
Alarm Display Area  
Zebra Pattern Display  
Two types of zebra patterns that indicate the luminance level  
of the video image can be displayed on this camera recorder.  
You can set the luminance levels for displaying the two types  
of zebra patterns.  
Menu Setting Screen  
For configuring various settings.  
Press the [MENU] button to display the menu setting screen.  
Zebra Pattern  
[Main Menu] Screen  
Memo :  
Use the [ZEBRA ON/OFF] switch in front to turn ON/OFF the  
zebra pattern display.  
Set the display pattern and luminance level in [LCD/VF]  
menu  
B
[Shooting Assist]  
B
20  
       
Preparations  
Knob  
Attaching Accessories  
Microphone  
Microphone Holder  
Attaching the Zoom Lens  
(Supplied with GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)  
Clamp  
Hole  
Pin  
3
1
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Terminal  
REC  
2
Attaching the Viewfinder (Supplied)  
1 Slide the viewfinder in the direction of the arrow to  
Clamp  
4
attach it.  
2 Turn the slide lock ring to secure the position of the  
viewfinder.  
1
Loosen the mount ring.  
Slide Lock Ring  
2 Attach the zoom lens such that the pin matches the  
hole of the mounting area.  
2
3 Tighten the mount ring.  
4 Connect the cable connector.  
5 Attach the lens cable to the clamp.  
Memo :  
Tighten the mount ring completely. If it is not fully tightened,  
the lens may drop or the back focus may be out of alignment.  
When attaching or removing the zoom lens, set the  
1
Viewfinder  
[POWER] switch of the camera recorder to AOFFB.  
3 Attach the viewfinder cable to the viewfinder terminal.  
4 Pin the viewfinder cable to the clamp.  
Attaching the Microphone (Supplied)  
You can attach the supplied microphone to the microphone  
holder.  
The supplied microphone has a phantom power supply.  
1Turn the knob on the microphone holder  
anticlockwise to loosen and open the microphone  
holder.  
4
Clamp  
3
2Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
3Turn the knob on the microphone holder clockwise to  
secure the microphone.  
4Connect the microphone cable to the [INPUT1] or  
[INPUT2] terminal.  
5Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.  
6Make sure to perform the correct settings for the  
phantom microphone (A Page 46).  
21  
         
Charging the Built-In Battery  
The date/time and time code data are stored using the  
built-in rechargeable battery.  
Power Supply  
When power is connected to the camera recorder, the  
built-in battery always gets charged. When the power is  
disconnected, the battery gradually discharges.  
The battery will be totally discharged if left unused for 3  
months and the date/time and time code data will be reset.  
When this happens, set the [POWER] switch to AONB to  
display the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the date/time.  
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a battery pack or  
connect an AC adapter to it.  
Note :  
Set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB before changing the  
power supply that operates this camera recorder.  
Using a Battery Pack  
Using AC Power  
(DC IN Power)  
Recommended Batteries  
U model : Dionic90 (Anton Bauer)  
E model : Endura-HL9 (IDX)  
Use an AC adapter (sold separately) to operate the camera  
recorder with AC power.  
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and  
the UL Listing mark is not applicable.  
1 Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to the  
[DC INPUT] terminal of the camera recorder.  
Note :  
Check that the power of the camera recorder and the AC  
adapter is turned AOFFB and connect as shown in the  
diagram.  
Make use of the recommended batteries. Heavy batteries  
may fall off if not used correctly.  
See the battery instruction manual on how to charge the  
battery.  
Battery Operating Time  
The following are the approximate times for continuous  
operation on fully-charged batteries.  
[DC INPUT]  
Continuous Operating Time  
Battery  
(At 25 f)  
Dionic90 (U model)  
Approx. 2.75 h  
Approx. 2.75 h  
Endura-HL9 (E model)  
DC Cable  
Memo :  
Actual operating times may differ depending on the age of  
the battery, charging condition, and operating environment.  
Operating time is shortened in cold environment.  
The operating time may shorten when power zoom is used,  
accessories are connected, or when the LCD monitor is  
frequently used.  
DC OUTPUT  
AC Adapter  
2 Set the [POWER] switch of the camera recorder to  
AONB after turning on the AC adapter.  
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.  
Note :  
Do not insert or remove the DC cable during recording.  
Do not use power supply of high voltage fluctuation,  
containing noise such as ripple, or with insufficient capacity.  
22  
     
Precautions for the Battery Operation  
Attaching the Battery  
(GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E)  
Do not remove the battery when the [POWER] switch is  
ON  
Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the battery is in  
use.  
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the battery inside  
will deplete the battery power even if you set the [POWER]  
Use the Endura-HL9 (IDX) battery.  
A
B.  
1
Attach the battery  
Face the terminal downward and attach the V mount of the  
battery onto the V mount attachment bracket of the camera  
recorder.  
switch to  
AOFFB. Remove the battery if you are not using the  
V Mount Attachment Bracket  
V Mount  
camera recorder.  
Attaching the Battery  
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U)  
Use the Dionic90 (Anton Bauer) battery.  
1
Align the battery guide pins (x3) with the battery,  
adapter, and guide hole, and insert straight.  
Guide Hole (x3)  
Guide Pins  
2 Press down the battery until it snaps into place.  
Release Lever  
Detaching the Battery  
Press down the release lever and slide the battery upward to  
detach it from the camera recorder.  
Release Button  
Battery  
LCD Screen Side  
Battery  
Memo :  
If the guide pins are not inserted straight, the battery will  
not be attached correctly.  
2 Slide the battery toward the SDHC card cover side  
panel until it snaps into place.  
Detaching the Battery  
Press down the release lever and slide the battery toward  
you to detach it from the camera recorder.  
Release Lever  
Battery  
23  
Warnings by Lamps and Alarm Tones  
Warning status is indicated by tally lamps and alarm tones.  
The front and back tally lamps of the camera recorder  
blink.  
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker or  
[PHONES] terminal.  
Power Status Display  
Memo :  
If you continue to use the camera recorder while the  
power warning is displayed, the camera recorder will stop  
automatically when the battery or supplied voltage from  
the AC adapter becomes lower.  
Viewfinder and LCD Monitor Screens  
The power status is displayed on the status and menu  
screens. If the battery or supplied voltage from the AC  
adapter is low, a warning will be displayed in red.  
Alarm tone is not output during recording.  
Note :  
Note :  
The remaining battery power and time are displayed as  
there are from the battery information. Accurate data may  
not be displayed according to the battery condition. Replace  
the battery as soon as possible when the remaining battery  
power and time are low.  
If the battery in use is not a recommended one, the battery  
mark which indicates the battery level may not appear.  
Status Screen  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
24p HQ  
Precautions for Batteries  
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when not in use.  
Do not expose the battery to high temperatures (such as in a  
car under direct sunlight). This will cause battery leakage  
and shorten the battery life.  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
S.DTL  
B -3  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
Operating time is shortened if the battery terminal is dirty.  
If the operating time shortens drastically even after charging,  
the battery may be reaching the end of its life. Replace the  
battery with a new one.  
RES  
Enlarged status display on the LCD monitor  
CH1  
CH2  
Charging  
DF  
FREE  
Use up the charge completely before you charge the battery.  
If the battery is not fully discharged before charging, the  
battery capacity may drop after repeated cycles.  
If the battery capacity drops due to repetitive shallow  
charging and discharging, it may be recovered by using up  
the charge completely and then fully charging the battery  
again.  
1280 x 720  
24p HQ  
STBY  
A
min  
RES  
100 min  
B
If you charge the battery immediately after using while the  
battery is still warm, it may not be fully charged.  
It is recommended that you charge the battery in an  
environment between 10  
be fully charged or the charging time may be prolonged if  
charged under low temperatures (below 10 ).  
f
and 35  
f. The battery may not  
f
24  
Camera Mode (Except AUX Mode)  
Turning On/Off the Power  
Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD  
monitor. When a recordable SDHC card is inserted, the  
camera recorder enters the recording standby mode.  
ASTBYB appears on the operation mode display area of the  
LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.  
Memo :  
Turning On the Power  
Playback of SDHC card is not possible in Camera mode.  
However, you can use the Clip Review function to check the  
1
Set the [POWER] switch to AONB.  
most recently recorded video clip. (  
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode.  
Memo :  
AUX Mode (U model only)  
The camera recorder always start up in Camera mode  
when the [POWER] switch is set to AONB.  
This is a mode for recording composite videos from an  
external device. When a recordable SDHC card is inserted,  
the camera recorder enters the recording standby mode.  
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.  
Composite videos from the external device are output to the  
viewfinder and LCD monitor.  
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] button to switch to a different mode.  
The operation mode indicator changes as below. While in  
the Camera mode, setting the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection  
switch to AAUXB switches the camera recorder to the AUX  
Memo :  
mode. (U model only)  
See [Operation Mode] (A Page 8) for details of each  
operation mode.  
[System Definition] is fixed at ASD (DV)B in the AUX mode.  
During Camera mode (Except AUX  
mode)  
: Lights up in blue/purple  
Media Mode (SD Card Mode)  
AUX Mode (U model only)  
: Blue  
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded  
on the SDHC card.  
When a playable SDHC card is inserted, the thumbnail or  
playback screen is output on the viewfinder and LCD  
monitor.  
During Media mode (SD Card mode) : Lights up in green  
Media Mode (IEEE1394 Input Mode)  
During USB mode  
: Lights up in orange  
: Lights up in orange  
During mode switching  
: Blinks in the color of the  
new mode  
Memo :  
Media Mode (IEEE1394 Input Mode)  
The camera recorder will switch to IEEE1394 Input mode  
only when the IEEE1394-connected equipment is in  
operation.  
This mode allows you to check IEEE1394 input signals.  
When playable IEEE1394 signals are input, input images are  
output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. IEEE1394 input  
signals cannot be recorded.  
Turning Off the Power  
[CAM/MEDIA] Button  
Set the camera recorder to the recording standby or stop  
mode.  
[MENU] Button  
Cross-Shaped  
Button  
1
Set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB.  
(JKH I)  
Set Button (R)  
2 Remove the battery and the power to the [DC INPUT]  
[CANCEL]  
Button  
terminal (when not in use for a long time).  
Note :  
Do not set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB during  
recording. Check that the operation mode display is  
ASTBYB or ASTOPB before you turn off the power.  
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER] switch to AOFFB  
during recording, wait for 5 seconds or more before you  
turn on the power again.  
[REC] Button  
[POWER] Switch  
When turning off the power, first set the [POWER] switch  
of the camera recorder to AOFFB. Do not remove the  
battery or turn off the AC power while the [POWER] switch  
is set to AONB.  
25  
 
2 Specify [Time Zone] and [Date/Time].  
A Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button (H I) and  
Setting the Clock  
(Initial Setting)  
select the setting item.  
B Change the values with the cross-shaped button (JK).  
Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Initial Setting]  
screen. The configured date/time data is saved in the  
built-in rechargeable battery even if the power is turned off.  
3 Press the Set button after setting is complete.  
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/time.  
Memo :  
The configured date/time data can be displayed on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder and be recorded to the SDHC card.  
Setting the Clock in the [Initial Setting]  
Screen  
The [Initial Setting] screen appears when the power is turned  
on for the first time and when the built-in battery is turned on  
again after being fully discharged.  
The value of the year can be set in the range of  
2099  
A2000B to  
A
B.  
All operations are disabled until initial settings are complete.  
Changing the Time after Initial Setting  
Setting the date/time (A Page 95)  
1
Select [Others] menu  
B
[Date/Time].  
The [Date/Time] setting screen appears.  
[MENU] Button  
Cross-Shaped  
Button  
(JKH I)  
Set Button  
(R)  
[POWER] Switch  
1
Set the [POWER] switch to AONB.  
2 Set the date and time.  
A Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button (H I) and  
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.  
For GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U  
select the setting item.  
B Change the values with the cross-shaped button (JK).  
3 Press the Set button (R) after setting is complete.  
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/time.  
For GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E  
26  
 
Adjusting the Monitor  
Speaker  
Changing the Display Style  
You can change the display style of the date/time on the  
menu.  
Memo :  
To perform the settings while looking at the monitor  
screen connected to the video signal output terminal, set  
[Analog Out Char.] or [SDI Out Char.] in the [A/V Out]  
menu to AOnB. (A Page 92)  
The monitor speaker can be rotated 180 degrees.  
Adjust according to the position of your ear.  
180 Degrees Rotation  
Setting the date style (Date Style) (A Page 91)  
A Select [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] menu B  
[Date Style].  
B Select the date display style.  
[Setting values : YMD (year, month, day), MDY (month,  
day, year), DMY (day, month, year)]  
Monitor  
Speaker  
C Press the Set button (R).  
Setting the time style (Time Style) (A Page 91)  
A Select [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] menu B  
[Time Style].  
B Select the time display style.  
[Setting values : 12hour (12 hour display), 24hour (24  
hour display)]  
[MONITOR] Level Adjustment Knob  
C Press the Set button (R).  
Memo :  
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker with the  
[MONITOR] level adjustment knob at the side control  
panel on the right of the camera recorder. Various warning  
alarm tones may also be output repeatedly. (A Page 135)  
Date/Time Display in Different Operation  
Modes  
Note :  
The rotation angle of the monitor speaker is 180 degrees.  
Do not over-rotate the monitor speaker.  
During Camera mode  
Date/time of the built-in clock is  
displayed.  
During AUX mode  
(U model)  
During Media mode  
(SD Card mode)  
Shooting date/time of the clip being  
played back is displayed.  
During Media mode  
Date/time is not displayed.  
(IEEE1394 mode)  
27  
 
5 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus of the object.  
6 Set the lens to the maximum wide angle position.  
7 Loosen the lock screw of the back focus ring.  
Adjusting Back Focus  
8 Shoot the same object and secure the back focus ring  
When the lens is first attached, adjust the back focus of the  
lens if the focus is not clear when zoomed to the telephoto or  
wide angle end.  
at the position where the object is in focus.  
9 Repeat steps 4 to 8 three times until the object is in  
Place an object 3 m and above away from the camera  
recorder.  
focus at both the telephoto and wide angle positions.  
The Siemens Star Chart is most suitable as the object.  
10 Tighten and secure the lock screw of the back focus  
3 4, 6  
5
ring.  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor  
and Viewfinder  
W
T
R E T  
A
M
I R I S  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor  
You can change the angle and brightness of the LCD monitor  
screen according to your usage condition.  
Changing the brightness of the screen will not affect the  
recorded images.  
1
M
[LCD BRIGHT +/-] Button  
LCD Lock Release Knob  
1
2 7, 8, 10  
2
Tilt 180 degrees  
upward  
Tilt 90 degrees  
downward  
[LCD PEAKING +/-] Button  
Adjusting the Angle of the LCD Monitor  
1
Slide the LCD lock release knob to open the LCD  
monitor.  
Siemens Star Chart  
2 Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.  
While the LCD monitor is open, you can rotate it 180  
degrees upward or 90 degrees downward.  
1
Set the iris mode switch of the lens to  
AMB  
(manual).  
Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees upward enables  
you to see the screen from the lens side. To display the  
image when it is viewed from the opposite direction  
(mirror image), perform setting as follows.  
2 Set the zoom mode switch to AMANU.B (manual).  
3 Turn to open the iris ring.  
[Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] menu B Set [LCD Mirror Mode]  
to AMirrorB B Press Set button (R) (A Page 88)  
Adjust the lighting such that the optimum image level can be  
obtained.  
4 Turn the zoom lever to set the lens to the maximum  
telephoto position.  
28  
     
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Screen  
[VF PEAKING] Knob  
[VF BRIGHT] Knob  
Adjusting contour and brightness  
Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/-] button to adjust the brightness  
of the LCD monitor screen. Press the [+] and [-] buttons  
simultaneously to return to standard settings.  
Eyepiece Focus Ring  
Eyepiece  
[+] : Press this button to brighten the screen.  
[-] : Press this button to darken the screen.  
Slide Lock Ring  
During adjustment, the brightness level is displayed on  
the LCD monitor screen.  
Eyepiece  
Lock Ring  
During Camera mode, SD Card mode (playback), or  
IEEE1394 mode  
During SD Card mode (thumbnail), menu operation, or  
USB mode  
Note :  
A high-definition viewfinder is used on this camera  
recorder in order to provide an accurate focusing  
environment. Due to the characteristic of the display  
device, colors may appear on the images when you blink  
your eyes. This is not a malfunction. It does not affect the  
recorded images, SDI output, or component output.  
Use the [LCD PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the contour of  
the LCD monitor screen. Press the [+] and [-] buttons  
simultaneously to return to standard settings.  
[+] : Press the button to increase contour correction.  
[-] : Press the button to decrease contour correction.  
Adjusting the Angle  
Adjust the position and angle of the viewfinder.  
During adjustment, the contour level is displayed on the  
LCD monitor screen.  
During Camera mode, SD Card mode (playback), or  
IEEE1394 mode  
Adjusting the Visibility  
Turn the eyepiece focus ring to sharpen the image on the  
viewfinder screen.  
During SD Card mode (thumbnail), menu operation, or  
USB mode  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Screen  
Adjusting contour and brightness  
Use the [VF BRIGHT] knob to adjust the brightness of the  
viewfinder screen.  
Use the [VF PEAKING] knob to adjust the contour of the  
viewfinder screen.  
T Screen display during adjustment  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
You can change the brightness and peaking of the viewfinder  
screen according to your usage conditions.  
Changing the brightness of the screen will not affect the  
recorded images.  
Displaying in black and white (A Page 88)  
You can display the viewfinder screen in black and white.  
[Main Menu]  
B
[LCD/VF] menu  
B
[VF Display] item  
B
Press Set button (R  
)
B
Select B & W  
A
B
B
Press Set button (R)  
29  
   
When [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] Menu  
is Set to AOnB (A Page 88)  
Displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens (VF)  
are indicated as below.  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD Display  
VF Display  
ON  
Closed LCD  
Normal LCD  
Inversed LCD  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Displays on the LCD Monitor and  
Viewfinder Screens  
Opened LCD Normal LCD  
Inversed LCD  
ON  
ON  
Memo :  
Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds to turn  
ON/OFF the LCD monitor screen.  
The function to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor screen by  
pressing the [DISPLAY] button can be canceled by  
opening/closing or rotating the LCD monitor.  
The viewfinder screen is always displayed.  
[DISPLAY] Button  
Normal LCD  
Tally Lamps  
Inversed LCD  
These are indicator lamps for recording and warning. The  
operation changes according to the menu settings. When the  
battery or remaining space on the SDHC card is low, the  
lamps blink. (Camera mode only)  
Set using [Tally System]/[Front Tally]/[Back Tally] in the [Main  
Menu] B [Others] menu. (A Page 94)  
LCD opened at  
40 degrees  
and above  
LCD closed at 40  
degrees and below  
When [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] Menu  
Front Tally Lamp  
is Set to AOffB (A Page 88)  
Displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens (VF)  
are indicated as below.  
LCD Monitor Status  
LCD Display  
VF Display  
ON  
Closed LCD  
Normal LCD  
Inversed LCD  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Opened LCD Normal LCD  
Inversed LCD  
OFF  
OFF  
Memo :  
Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds to  
switch the display between the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screens.  
Back Tally Lamp  
The function to switch between LCD monitor and  
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY] button can  
be canceled by opening/closing or rotating the LCD  
monitor.  
When the LCD monitor is stored in the camera recorder in  
the direction of normal display, pressing of the [DISPLAY]  
button will not work.  
You can display both the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screens at the same time by selecting [LCD + VF] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 88)  
30  
   
[Tally System]  
^
[Int]  
[Ext]  
[Studio]  
SDHC Card Cover Knob  
Slot B Status Indicator  
Menu  
Setting  
[Front Tally]/  
[Back Tally] *1  
Off On Blin On Blink On Blink  
k
Camera  
Recorder  
Information  
Warning  
Alarm  
^
^
^
^
J
o
^
^
J
^
^
J
o
o*2  
SDHC Card  
Cover  
Slot A Status  
External  
Device  
Information  
Warning  
Alarm  
Indicator  
^
^
^
^
J
^
^
[SLOT SELECT]  
Button  
Camera  
Recorder  
Recording  
Status  
Recording  
^
^
R
R
R
R
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
Special  
Recording *3  
External  
Device  
Recording  
Recording  
^
^
^
R
R
^
^
Status  
Remote  
Control Unit  
Input  
[CALL]  
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
o
R
X
o
R
X
[TALLY(PGM)]  
[TALLY(PVW)]  
Estimated Recordable Time of SDHC  
Cards  
R : Lights up  
o: Blinks once in 1 second  
X : Only back tally lamp lights up  
The estimated recordable time is only a guide. Differences  
may occur depending on the SDHC card in use and the  
battery condition.  
J : Blinks four times in 1 second  
*1 : [Front Tally] and [Back Tally] can be set independently  
with the menu settings. (A Page 94)  
*2 : Only battery alarm is displayed.  
*3 : Paused state during special recording ([Clip  
SDHC Card Size  
8 GB 16 GB  
Camera  
Resolution  
Bit Rate  
4 GB  
32 GB  
Memo :  
1280x720  
1440x1080  
1920x1080  
Blinking takes priority over lighting up.  
HQ  
12 min 25 min 50 min  
100 min  
1440x1080  
1280x720  
720 x 480  
720 x 576  
SP  
SP  
--  
--  
17 min 35 min 70 min  
22 min 45 min 90 min  
15 min 30 min 60 min  
15 min 30 min 60 min  
140 min  
180 min  
120 min  
120 min  
SDHC Cards  
Memo :  
If the SDHC card contains files recorded by devices other  
than this camera recorder or files that are saved from a  
PC, the recordable time may be shorter or data may not  
be properly recorded.  
This camera recorder saves the recorded images and audio  
sound on the SDHC card (sold separately) in the card slot.  
Memo :  
If the SDHC card contains files recorded by devices other  
than this camera recorder or files that are saved from a  
PC, the recordable time may be shorter or data may not  
be properly recorded.  
Write-Protect Switch on the SDHC Card  
A Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable writing or  
deleting.  
SDHC Cards to Use  
B Slide the write-protect switch downward to prevent writing  
Use a Class 6/10 SDHC card (4 GB - 32 GB).  
or deleting. (Images in the card are protected.)  
Note :  
Write-Protect Switch  
Using cards other than those from Panasonic, TOSHIBA  
or SanDisk may result in recording failure or data loss.  
A
B
Write/Delete Enabled  
Write/Delete Disabled  
31  
     
2
1
3
Inserting an SDHC Card  
This camera recorder comes with two card slots for video/  
audio recording and playback (Slot A and B).  
4
1 Slide the SDHC card cover knob of the desired slot in  
Memo :  
When both slots are inserted with usable SDHC cards, the  
the direction of the arrow and open the cover.  
previously selected slot is used.  
2 Insert an SDHC card with the notched corner first.  
Note :  
Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the camera  
recorder or remove the SDHC card when it is being  
accessed. All data recorded on the card, including the file  
that is being accessed, may be corrupted. Be sure to  
check whether the status indicator is lighted in green or  
not before you turn off the power or remove the SDHC  
card.  
3 Close the SDHC card cover.  
1
Notched Corner  
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is being  
accessed, reinsert the card only after the status indicator  
goes off.  
The SDHC card may not be recognized if you insert and  
remove the card within a short time. When this happens,  
remove the card and wait for a few seconds before you  
reinsert.  
SDHC Card  
2
3
Card Slot Status Indicator  
The following table shows the respective states of slot A and B.  
Switching SDHC cards  
When both card slots are inserted with SDHC cards, you can  
use the [SLOT SELECT] button to switch the card to use.  
When the memory on an SDHC card is full during recording,  
data recording automatically switches to the other card.  
Lamp  
Slot Status  
Lights up in red  
Inserted SDHC card is being accessed.  
(writing/reading data)  
Do not turn off the power of the camera  
recorder or remove the SDHC card.  
[SLOT SELECT] Button  
Lights up in green  
Light goes out  
On standby. Inserted SDHC card can be  
used for recording or playback.  
SDHC card is not inserted.  
An unusable card is inserted.  
An SDHC card is inserted but a different  
slot is selected.  
Cross-Shaped  
Button  
(JKH I)  
Set Button (R)  
[CANCEL] Button  
Removing the SDHC Card  
1
Check that the SDHC card to be removed is not being  
accessed (lights up in red).  
Note :  
The [SLOT SELECT] button is disabled during recording  
or playback. Cards will not be switched even if you press  
the button.  
2 Slide the SDHC card cover knob in the direction of the  
arrow and open the cover.  
3 Push the SDHC card and remove it from the slot.  
4 Close the SDHC card cover.  
32  
 
6 Formatting is complete.  
ACompleteB appears when formatting is complete.  
Formatting (Initializing) SDHC Cards  
When the following cards are inserted,  
AFORMATTING REQUIREDB appears. Format the card  
using the camera recorder menu.  
Memo :  
If you do not want to format the card, select [Cancel] or  
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous  
screen.  
Unformatted SDHC cards  
SDHC cards formatted under different specifications  
If you remove the SDHC card during formatting,  
AFormat Error!B appears and the camera recorder returns  
to the previous screen.  
* For details of the menu operation, see  
During formatting, menu operation is unavailable but you  
can start recording. However, this is only available when a  
recordable SDHC card is inserted in the other slot.  
Formatting cannot be performed in the following cases.  
Recording is in progress on the SDHC card to be  
formatted.  
Note :  
Be sure to format the SDHC card on this camera recorder.  
SDHC cards formatted on a PC and other peripheral  
equipment cannot be used on this camera recorder.  
Memo :  
To cancel the message display, press the [CANCEL]  
button. A [!] mark appears at the remaining media display  
area when an SDHC card that requires formatting is  
inserted.  
SDHC card is not inserted.  
Write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set (  
is  
displayed).  
Note :  
1 Select [Format Media] in the [Media] menu.  
If you format the SDHC card, all data recorded on the  
card, including video data and setup files, will be deleted.  
2 Select the slot of the SDHC card to be formatted and  
press the Set button (R).  
2
3 The status of the selected SDHC card appears.  
4 Select [Format] and press the Set button (R).  
4
5 Formatting starts.  
33  
 
4 Restoring is complete.  
When restoring is complete, ACompleteB appears and the  
camera recorder returns to the [Restore Media] screen.  
When no media that requires restoring is inserted, the  
camera recorder returns to the [Media] menu screen.  
Restoring the SDHC Card  
It is necessary to restore the SDHC card if an abnormality  
occurs to the data in the card due to some reasons.  
The message ARESTORE MEDIAB appears on the LCD  
monitor/viewfinder screen when an SDHC card that requires  
restoring is inserted.  
Memo :  
To cancel the message display, press the [CANCEL]  
button. A [!] mark appears at the remaining media display  
area when an SDHC card that requires formatting is  
inserted.  
Note :  
[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera mode.  
However, it cannot be selected while the camera recorder  
is recording. Select [Restore Media] in Camera mode  
when the camera recorder is not recording.  
[Restore Media] does not restore the SDHC card to its  
original states completely. If restoring fails, replace or  
format the SDHC card. Take note that formatting the  
SDHC card erases all information inside.  
1
Select [Restore Media] in the [Media] menu. (  
2 Select the SDHC card to be restored and press the Set  
button (R).  
Memo :  
2
Restoring cannot be performed in the following cases.  
Camera recorder is recording in progress.  
SDHC card is not inserted.  
Write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set (  
displayed).  
is  
Restoring is not required.  
3 Restoring starts.  
34  
 
Recorded Clips  
This camera recorder uses FAT32 File System.  
Clips Recorded to SDHC Cards  
As such, recorded materials may be split into several files  
due to the file size. However, they can be played back  
continuously on the camera recorder. Clips may be recorded  
across the two SDHC cards in card slots A and B depending  
on the recording time of the clip.  
When copying clips to a HDD using a PC, it is recommended  
to use [JVC Clip Manager Software], which is found in the  
bundled CD-ROM, to maintain continuity.  
Folders in the SDHC Card  
Images captured are recorded to [PRIVATE] B [JVC] folder  
inside the SDHC card.  
Images recorded are sorted into the respective folders  
according to the menu settings below.  
[System Definition]  
Setting  
[File Format]  
Setting  
Folders in the  
SDHC Card  
Note :  
HD (MPEG2)  
HD (MPEG2)  
SD (DV)  
MOV  
MP4  
MOV  
AVI  
CQAV  
BPAV  
CQDV  
CADV  
A clip recorded across several cards cannot be played  
back continuously. Continuous playback is only possible  
when the recording is made on one card.  
SD (DV)  
Memo :  
By formatting (initializing) the SDHC card from the  
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder, folders  
required for recording in the current [System Definition]  
settings and [File Format] settings will be generated.  
When the [System Definition] settings and [File Format]  
settings are changed, folders required for recording in those  
settings will be automatically generated.  
Note :  
When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted using the  
Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac), recording to the  
SDHC card may fail if formatting (initializing) of the card is  
not performed.  
Recording Clips  
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name  
When recording is stopped, the images, audio and  
accompanying data which are recorded from start to stop are  
recorded as one “clip” on the SDHC card.  
An 8-character clip name is automatically generated for the  
recorded clip. (Clip Name Prefix + Clip Number)  
Example:  
ABCG0001  
Clip Number  
A number in automatic ascending order is  
assigned in the recording order.  
The clip number can be reset in the menu.  
* [Clip Set]  
B
[Reset Clip Number] (  
Clip Name Prefix (any 4 alphanumeric characters)  
This is set to AxxxGB (AxxxB denotes the last 3 digits of the  
serial number) by default.  
Memo :  
Before recording starts, you can set any characters for the  
clip name prefix by using [Main Menu] B [Record Set]  
menu B [Clip Set] B [Clip Name Prefix]. (A Page 76)  
Changes cannot be made after recording.  
35  
   
Shooting  
Basic Shooting Procedures  
[REC] Button  
Back Tally Lamp  
1
3
Front Tally Lamp  
2
5
[POWER] Switch  
[REC] Button  
4
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording to the SDHC  
card.  
Preparations  
There are two [REC] buttons on the camera recorder and  
one on the lens. Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to  
start/stop recording by default.  
During recording, the front and back tally lamps light up in  
red.  
1 Attach the accessories. (A Page 21)  
2 Supply battery or AC adapter power to the camera  
3 Insert an SDHC card. (A Page 31)  
Memo :  
Tally lamps can be turned off with [Front Tally]/  
[Back Tally] in the [Others] menu. (A Page 94)  
To separately control this camera recorder and other  
equipment connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal, you can  
configure the setting at [1394 Rec Trigger] in the [Others]  
4 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.  
Set the [POWER] switch to AONB. The camera recorder  
starts up in Camera mode and is ready for shooting.  
5 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
3
Check the most recently captured images (Clip Review).  
Press the [RET] button on the lens to activate the Clip  
Review function (A Page 56). The most recently captured  
images are played back on the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screens. After playback, the camera recorder returns to  
standby mode (STBY).  
Shooting  
1
Configure the video and audio input settings.  
You have to configure video settings such as brightness  
adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and white balance adjustment  
in order to start shooting. You also have to adjust the audio  
input settings and audio recording level for audio recording.  
* When [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] B  
[LENS RET] is set to AClip ReviewB (A Page 79)  
Adjusting the Iris (  
Setting the Electronic Shutter (  
Adjusting the White Balance (  
Adjusting the White Shading (  
Setting the ND Filter (  
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and Recording Level  
36  
     
Focus Assist Function  
When the [FOCUS ASSIST] button is pressed during  
shooting, the focused area is displayed in color (blue, red, or  
green). This enables easy and accurate focusing. Select the  
color in the menu.  
[FOCUS ASSIST] Button  
Memo :  
When [Main Menu]  
B
[LCD/VF] menu  
ACCU-Focus  
becomes shallower to enable easier focusing. (  
The ACCU-Focus  
B
[Shooting Assist]  
B
[Focus Assist] is set to  
A
B, the depth of field  
Off  
A
B
function switches automatically to  
A
B
after about 10 seconds.  
Select the display color in [Main Menu]  
B
[LCD/VF]  
B
[Shooting Assist]  
B
[Color]. (  
The [VF PEAKING] knob and [LCD PEAKING +/-] button do  
not function when Focus Assist is activated.  
Assigning Focus Assist function to the [RET]  
button on the lens  
You can assign the Focus Assist function to the [RET] button  
on the lens.  
* Set [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] B  
[LENS RET] to AFocus AssistB. (A Page 79)  
37  
 
List of Formats  
The following is a list of file formats and video formats that  
can be selected on this camera recorder.  
Selecting System  
Definition, File Format and  
Video Format  
When [System Definition] is set to AHD (MPEG2)B  
Record Format  
You can select the system definition (HD or SD), file format  
for recording/playback and the record format for video  
images on this camera recorder.  
Camera Resolution  
Horizontal×Line  
Remarks  
File Format  
Frame & Bit Rate  
QuickTime 1280x720  
60p (HQ)  
60p (SP)  
Memo :  
HDV  
compatible  
Make a selection in [Main Menu]  
B
[Record Format] menu.  
30p (HQ)  
30p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
Selecting a System Definition  
Select the system definition in [System Definition].  
There are two different definitions for selection.  
HD (MPEG2) : Records in HD (High Definition) quality  
24p (HQ)  
24p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
SD (DV)  
: Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality  
50p (HQ)  
50p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
Selecting a File Format  
Select a file format in [File Format].  
There are three file formats for selection.  
25p (HQ)  
25p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
QuickTime  
MP4  
: QuickTime file format (.MOV)  
: MP4 file format  
1440x1080  
1920x1080  
60i (HQ)  
60i (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
AVI  
: Standard video file format for Windows  
systems  
50i (HQ)  
50i (SP)  
Memo :  
HDV  
compatible  
The available options vary as follows depending on the  
[System Definition] setting.  
60i (HQ)  
30p (HQ)  
50i (HQ)  
25p (HQ)  
24p (HQ)  
60p (HQ)  
60p (SP)  
Full HD  
Full HD  
Full HD  
Full HD  
Full HD  
AHD (MPEG2)B : QuickTime, MP4  
ASD (DV)B  
: QuickTime, AVI  
Selecting a Video Format  
MP4  
1280x720  
Select a [Record Format] from the list of formats. The  
selectable [Frame & Bit Rate] changes according to the  
settings of [System Definition], [File Format], and  
[Camera Resolution].  
HDV  
compatible  
30p (HQ)  
30p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
The recording bit rate is 35 Mbps VBR when AHQB is  
selected, and 18.3 Mbps (1080i is 25 Mbps) CBR when ASPB  
is selected.  
24p (HQ)  
24p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
50p (HQ)  
50p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
25p (HQ)  
25p (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
1440x1080  
1920x1080  
60i (SP)  
50i (SP)  
HDV  
compatible  
HDV  
compatible  
60i (HQ)  
30p (HQ)  
50i (HQ)  
25p (HQ)  
24p (HQ)  
Full HD  
Full HD  
Full HD  
Full HD  
Full HD  
38  
 
When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B  
Adjusting the Iris  
When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B, the video  
format is fixed as follows for the different models.  
Record Format  
Camera Resolution  
Horizontal×Line  
Remarks  
File Format  
Frame & Bit Rate  
You can adjust the aperture of the lens iris manually or  
automatically according to the brightness of the object.  
QuickTime/ 720 x 480(U model) 60i  
AVI  
DV  
compatible  
720 x 576(E model) 50i  
DV  
compatible  
Iris Ring  
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos  
Select an aspect ratio for the images.  
The available options vary as follows depending on the  
[System Definition] setting.  
W
T
R E T  
A
M
I R I S  
[IRIS] Switch  
AHD (MPEG2)B:Fixed at 16:9  
ASD (DV)B  
: 16:9, 4:3  
Setting the Record Format Menu  
1 Display the [Main Menu] B [Record Format] menu.  
2 Set each of the items.  
3 After setting is complete for all items, select [SET] at  
the bottom of the screen, and press the Set button (R).  
The record format is switched.  
A APlease WaitB message appears on the screen during  
switching.  
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode  
Set the [IRIS] switch on the lens to AMB to enter Manual Iris  
mode.  
Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the iris manually.  
Memo :  
Even during Manual Iris mode, the camera recorder  
enters forced Auto Iris mode while the [IRIS AUTO] button  
is pressed.  
3
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode  
Set the [IRIS] switch on the lens to AAB to enter Auto Iris  
mode. The iris is automatically adjusted according to the  
brightness of the object.  
Note :  
[System Definition] is fixed at ASD (DV)B in the AUX mode.  
Memo :  
Only [File Format] and [Aspect Ratio] can be set. (U model)  
Even when the [IRIS] switch of the lens is set to AMB, it  
switches automatically to Auto Iris mode when the [FULL  
AUTO] switch is set to AONB.  
When [Iris Control] in the [Camera Function] B  
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to AOffB, you can adjust the iris  
manually even if the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera  
recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)  
You can use the cross-shaped button (H I) on this camera  
recorder to set the target level (brighter/darker) of the auto  
iris. You can also use the menu to set the tracking  
sensitivity of the auto iris. (A Page 78)  
39  
   
Setting Gain  
Setting the Electronic  
Shutter  
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity when  
there is insufficient illumination on the object. You can set the  
gain of the video amplifier according to the brightness of the  
object. Select the setting mode according to your shooting  
conditions.  
You can change the shutter speed (time for each shooting  
frame) using the electronic shutter function. Electronic  
shutter can be adjusted manually or automatically.  
Fixed Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter  
Switching)  
[GAIN] Selection  
Switch  
Use the Set button (R) to switch between the shutter modes  
and the cross-shaped button (JK) to switch between the  
speeds.  
[FULL AUTO]  
Switch  
[FULL AUTO] Switch  
Set Button (R)  
Fixed Gain Mode (Manual Gain Switching)  
You can select the gain of the video amplifier using the  
[GAIN] switch on the camera recorder.  
Cross-Shaped Button  
(JK)  
The default positions of the switch are as follows.  
[L] : 0 dB (No electrical boosting.)  
[M] : 9 dB (Boosts sensitivity by about 2.8 times. )  
[H] : 18 dB (Boosts sensitivity by about 8 times. )  
Memo :  
The gain value of each position can be set to  
A
ALC  
(in increments of 3 dB)  
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes the screen to  
appear grainier. ( Page 79)  
B
and  
Switching Shutter Mode  
Press the Set button (center of the cross-shaped button) to  
turn ON/OFF the shutter.  
within the range of  
A0dB  
B
to A18dBB  
Memo :  
When the shutter is ON, AStepB, AVariableB, or AEEIB  
(Extended Electric Iris, i.e. Automatic Shutter mode) may  
be selected using [Shutter] in the [Camera Function]  
menu. AStepB is the factory default. (A Page 78)  
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain  
Adjustment)  
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder to AONB  
to enter Automatic gain Level Control (AALCB fixed). The  
gain of the video amplifier is automatically set according to  
the brightness of the object.  
In this case, the [GAIN] switch on the camera recorder is  
disabled.  
Memo :  
When [Gain] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]  
menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch the gain with the  
[GAIN] switch even if the [FULL AUTO] switch on the  
camera recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)  
40  
   
Switching Shutter Speed  
When shutter is ON, use the cross-shaped button (JK) to set  
the shutter speed. Shutter speed differs according to the  
video format and variable frame rate settings.  
Camera  
Resolution/  
Frame & Bit  
Rate  
720/25p  
Shutter  
Frame Rate  
50, 25, 12.5  
40, 20, 10  
1/10000  
J
Button  
During modes other than Variable Frame Rec  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/50  
720/60p  
720/30p  
1080/60i  
1080/30p  
480/60i  
720/50p  
720/25p  
1080/50i  
1080/25p  
576/50i  
Camera  
Resolution/  
Frame & Bit  
Rate  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/50  
720/24p  
Shutter  
1080/24p  
J
Button  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/100  
1/60  
Step  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/100  
1/60  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/120  
1/50  
(Standard)  
1/40  
1/25  
1/20  
1/12.5  
1/6.25  
1/10  
Step  
K
J
Button  
Button  
1/5  
(Upper limit)  
(Lower limit)  
1/10489.5  
(Standard)  
1/48  
Variable  
~
1/30  
1/25  
1/24  
1/15  
1/12.5  
1/6.25  
1/10489.5  
~
1/12  
K
Button  
1/50.00  
1/40.00  
K
J
Button  
Button  
1/7.5  
1/6  
(Upper limit)  
(Standard)  
Memo :  
Shutter speed is usually displayed in seconds (SEC).  
However, only when [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A24p  
(SP)B, A24p (HQ)B, A25p (SP)B, or A25p (HQ)B, the speed  
can be displayed in angle (DEG).  
Variable  
1/60.00  
1/50.00  
~
1/48.00  
1/24.01  
K
Button  
(Lower limit)  
1/30.03  
1/25.04  
During Variable Frame Rec  
Camera  
720/30p  
720/24p  
Resolution/  
Frame & Bit  
Shutter  
Rate  
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic Shutter  
Adjustment)  
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder to AONB  
to enter the automatic shutter adjustment mode. The shutter  
speed is automatically adjusted according to the brightness  
of the object.  
Switching of shutter speed with the cross-shaped  
button (JK) and switching of shutter mode with the Set  
button (R) are disabled.  
Frame Rate  
60, 30, 15 48, 24, 12 40, 20, 10  
J
Button  
1/10000  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/100  
1/60  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/100  
1/60  
1/10000  
1/4000  
1/2000  
1/1000  
1/500  
1/250  
1/100  
1/60  
Step  
Memo :  
When [Shutter] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]  
menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch the shutter mode  
with the Set button (R) and shutter speed with the cross-  
shaped button (JK) even if the [FULL AUTO] switch on  
the camera recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)  
When [Shutter] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]  
menu is set to AEEIB, the camera recorder enters  
Automatic Shutter Adjustment mode. Switching of shutter  
mode with the Set button (R) and shutter speed with  
cross-shaped button (JK) is disabled. (A Page 81)  
1/48  
(Standard)  
1/48  
1/40  
1/30  
1/24  
1/20  
1/15  
1/12  
1/10  
K
J
Button  
Button  
1/7.5  
1/6  
1/5  
(Upper limit)  
(Lower limit)  
1/10489.5  
Variable  
~
K
Button  
1/60.00  
1/48.00  
1/40.00  
41  
 
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode (B)  
Adjusting the White  
Balance  
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or Memory B.  
When the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch is set to [A] or [B],  
press the [AWB] button to execute white balance. The white  
balance will be automatically adjusted and the adjusted  
value will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.  
Adjust the white balance according to the color temperature  
of the lighting. You can select the adjustment mode  
according to the shooting conditions.  
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies according to  
the light source, it is necessary to readjust the white balance  
when the main light source illuminating the object changes.  
1
Prepare the camera recorder.  
ASet the [POWER] switch to AONB.  
BSet the iris mode switch of the lens to AAB (automatic).  
CSet the [FULL AUTO] switch to AOFFB.  
[WHT.BAL.] Selection Switch  
2 Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the lighting  
[FULL AUTO]  
Switch  
3 Set the [WHT.BAL.] switch to AAB or ABB.  
4 Locate a place with similar lighting conditions as the  
object to be shot, place a white object near the center of  
the screen and zoom in to fill the screen with white.  
5 Press the [AWB] (Auto White Balance) button.  
[POWER]  
Switch  
The white detection frame appears when Auto White  
Balance is activated. Fill the frame with white completely.  
A
AUTO WHITE A, B OPERATIONB appears on the  
[AWB] Button  
viewfinder when Auto White Balance is activated.  
When the correct white balance is achieved,  
AAUTO WHITE A, B OKB appears for about 3 seconds  
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual  
Switching)  
together with the approximate color temperature.  
You can select the white balance with the [WHT.BAL.]  
selection switch.  
Use the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch to select APRESETB  
(preset mode), AAB (memory A mode), or ABB (memory B  
mode).  
AUTO WHITE A  
OPERATION  
White Detection Frame  
Memo :  
The [FAW] (Fulltime Auto White balance) function can be  
assigned to the [A], [B], or [PRESET] button using  
[Switch Set] in the [Camera Function] menu. (A Page 79)  
In [FAW] mode, color temperature of the images is  
sampled and white balance is automatically adjusted to  
the appropriate level.  
When [White Balance] in the [Camera Function] B  
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to AFAWB and the [FULL AUTO]  
switch on the camera recorder is set to AONB, the mode is  
fixed at AFAWB.  
[AWB] Activating  
AUTO WHITE A  
OK <3200K>  
Result Display  
Preset Mode (PRESET)  
Two different color temperature settings are registered on  
this camera recorder. You can switch between them using  
the [AWB] button.  
Note :  
Do not use highly reflective objects, such as metals. Doing  
so may result in improper white balance adjustment.  
The Auto White function cannot provide optimum white  
balance with an object outside the adjustment range, for  
example when it contains only a single color or not enough  
white color.  
(Default setting: A3200KB1A5600KB)  
You can change both the color temperature settings in the  
Preset mode in the menu.  
[Main Menu]  
Select either [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative Temp.].  
B
[Camera Process]  
B
[White Balance] menu  
B
1 Set the [W. BAL] switch to APRESETB.  
2 Press the [AWB] button.  
Press the [AWB] button to switch to a different color  
temperature. (APreset Temp.B1AAlternative Temp.B)  
42  
   
Error Message  
If the white balance adjustment is not correctly completed,  
one of the following messages will appear for about 5  
seconds.  
Error Message  
NG : OBJECT  
Status  
The object used is defective.  
Displayed when there is not enough  
white color on the object, or when the  
color temperature is not suitable.  
Use another white object and adjust  
the white balance again.  
ERROR : LOW LIGHT  
ERROR : OVER LIGHT  
Insufficient illumination.  
Displayed when the lighting is dark.  
Increase the lighting and adjust the  
white balance again.  
Excessive illumination.  
Displayed when the lighting is too  
bright. Decrease the lighting and adjust  
the white balance again.  
White Paint Adjustment  
You can fine-tune the white balance saved in Memory A or  
Memory B.  
* Adjust [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] in [Main Menu] B  
[Camera Process] B [White Balance] menu (A Page 85)  
When [AWB] is selected, the normal white paint adjustment  
value is cleared. However, you can also set to keep the value  
even when [AWB] is executed. (A Page 85)  
Automatic White Balance Mode  
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)  
You can assign AFAWB (Fulltime Auto White balance) to any  
of the three positions on the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch.  
Configure the setting with [FAW] in the [Camera Function] B  
[SW Set] menu. (A Page 79)  
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder to AONB  
to enter FAW mode. White balance is automatically adjusted  
according to the color temperature of the lighting on the  
object.  
White balance switching with the [WHT.BAL.] selection  
switch is disabled.  
Memo :  
When [White Balance] in the [Camera Function] B  
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch  
the white balance with the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch on  
the camera recorder. (A Page 81)  
Note :  
The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of Auto White  
Balance.  
When the power of the camera recorder is turned on with  
the [FAW] mode selected, it takes about 15 seconds for  
the colors to stabilize.  
43  
CSelect the item to change with the cross-shaped  
Adjusting the White  
Shading  
button (JK) and press the Set button (R).  
DChange the setting value with the cross-shaped  
button (JK) while looking at the evaluated value at the  
bottom right of the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.  
If the evaluated value of the adjusting channel is larger  
than 0, use the cross-shaped button (K) to change the  
setting value so that the value is more or less AEvenB.  
Similarly, if the value is smaller than 0, use the cross-  
shaped button (J) to change the setting value.  
You need to adjust white shading when you change the lens.  
Even if white balance is adjusted in the center of the screen,  
the top and bottom of the screen may not be adjusted.  
In this case, green and yellow colors may appear on the  
screen. This is due to the characteristic of the lens.  
Correcting this phenomena is known as white shading  
adjustment.  
Red adjustment  
Green adjustment  
Blue adjustment  
[R]  
[G]  
[B]  
Perform this adjustment after adjusting the white balance.  
[MENU] Button  
(Adjustment range : Min (-128) to Normal to Max (127))  
Memo :  
Cross-Shaped  
Button (JK)  
There may be some delay in the changes of the evaluated  
value after pressing the cross-shaped button (JK).  
Increasing the setting value suppresses the colors at the  
bottom and enhances the colors on top.  
Set Button (R)  
EPress the Set button (R) to save the settings after the  
changes are complete.  
FSelect [Back] and press the Set button (R) to return to  
the [White Balance] menu.  
Top  
C D  
F
1
Fill the monitor screen with a pattern box of uniform light  
source or white (plain) paper shone with uniform lighting.  
Evaluated  
Value  
2 Set the control of the camera lens as follows.  
ASet the aperture to F4 or more such that the iris  
achieves optimum brightness.  
Btm  
Evaluated Value Detection Frames  
If the brightness is insufficient even at F4, set to the  
optimum brightness by increasing the lighting.  
7 Press the [MENU] button to return to the normal  
screen.  
BWhen using a zoom lens, set to the center of the zoom  
adjustment range.  
8 Readjust the white balance. (A Page 42)  
3 Adjust the white balance of the camera recorder.  
Note :  
If the lens setup is incorrect, you may over-correct the white  
shading. Set to the recommended settings for the lens. (Do  
not open the iris more than F4. Do not adjust the zoom lens  
at the telephoto or wide angle end.)  
4 Set the chroma level of the monitor to the maximum.  
5 Check the monitor screen.  
White shading occurs as a result of the optical characteristic  
of the attached lens. This is not a camera malfunction.  
There is no need for adjustment if there is no color at the top  
and bottom of the screen.  
If the top of the screen is greenish and the bottom is reddish  
or vice versa, continue this adjustment.  
Evaluated value:  
A value that compares the average values of the R, G, B  
channels in the evaluated value detection frames at the top  
(Top) and bottom (Btm) of the LCD monitor or viewfinder  
(difference between [Top] and [Btm]).  
6 Adjust the white shading.  
It is recommended to adjust only G (green).  
If [Top] is larger than [Btm], a negative value is displayed. If  
[Top] is smaller than [Btm], a positive value is displayed.  
When there is no difference between [Top] and [Btm],  
AEvenB is displayed. Set such that the evaluated value is  
more or less AEvenB.  
A
Set [Main Menu]  
[Shading Mode] to  
B
[Camera Process]  
B
[White Balance]  
B
A
B
BSelect [Adjust] in the [White Balance] menu and press  
the Set button (R).  
44  
   
Setting the ND Filter  
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the appropriate  
range.  
Switch according to the brightness of the object. When the  
switch is changed, the position of the switched ND filter is  
displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.  
(STATUS 1 Screen)  
[ND FILTER]  
Switch  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
24p HQ  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
S.DTL  
B -3  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
282min  
Displays the position of the ND filter  
[1/16]  
[1/4]  
Reduces the amount of incident light to 1/16. Select  
this for extremely bright outdoor environments.  
Reduces the amount of incident light to 1/4. Select  
this for bright and sunny outdoor environments.  
[OFF]  
Select this for indoor and dark outdoor environments.  
Memo :  
The display of the ND filter position is set to AOffB by  
default. To display the position of the ND filter, set [Filter]  
in the [LCD/VF] B [Status Display] menu to AOnB.  
It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the lens  
aperture to less than F5.6.  
45  
 
Adjusting Audio Input  
Settings and Recording  
Level  
Adjusting Audio Recording Level  
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels for the two  
channels (CH-1/CH-2) manually or automatically.  
You can record audio from the two channels (CH-1/CH-2) in  
synchronization with video images on this camera recorder.  
The camera recorder is equipped with [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]  
terminals for audio input. You can select a recording channel  
and the adjustment mode (manual/automatic).  
[AUDIO LEVEL  
CH-1/CH-2]  
Adjustment Knob  
[CH-2 INPUT] Selection Switch  
[FULL AUTO] Switch  
When the LCD monitor is open  
[AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2]  
Selection Switch  
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2]  
Mode Switch  
Manual Adjustment Mode  
[INPUT1/INPUT2] Terminal  
(Manual Adjustment)  
Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch on the camera  
recorder to AMANUALB to enter the manual adjustment  
mode, and use the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2] adjustment  
knob to set the recording level.  
Setting Audio Input  
Select the audio to input through [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]  
You can adjust the level manually during the recording,  
recording pause, and stop modes.  
terminals with the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] mode switch.  
[LINE]  
[MIC]  
Use this setting when connecting to an audio device or  
other equipment. The reference input level is +4 dBu.  
1
Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch to  
A
MANUAL for the channel to manually adjust the  
B
Use this setting when connecting to a dynamic  
microphone.  
recording level.  
[MIC+48V] Use this setting when connecting to a microphone  
(phantom microphone) that requires a +48 V power  
supply.  
2 Turn the corresponding [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]  
adjustment knob to adjust the level.  
Adjust such that the audio level meter does not light up at -2 dB  
even for loud sounds.  
Note :  
When connecting a device that does not require a +48 V  
power supply, make sure that it is not set to the  
AMIC+48VB position.  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
24p HQ  
When the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] mode switch is set to  
AMICB, make sure that a microphone is connected to the  
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal. If you increase the recording  
level when a microphone is not connected, noise from the  
input terminal may be recorded.  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
S.DTL  
B -3  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
282min  
When a microphone is not connected to the [INPUT1/INPUT2]  
terminal, set the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] mode switch to LINE or  
STATUS 1 Screen  
A
B
adjust the volume with the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]  
recording level adjustment knob.  
Audio Level Meter  
Memo :  
-2 dB  
Set the reference input level of  
using [Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2 Mic Ref.] in the  
[Main Menu] [Record Set] [Audio Set] menu.  
AMIC  
B
and AMIC+48VB  
Memo :  
B
B
Set [Audio Limiter] in the [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B  
[Audio Set] menu to AOnB to activate the audio limiter in  
the Manual Adjustment mode. This controls the recording  
level when excessive audio signals are input.  
Setting of [CH-2 INPUT] Selection Switch  
Use the [CH-2 INPUT] selection switch to select the audio to  
be recorded to CH-2.  
For the reference level to be recorded on SDHC cards, set  
[Audio Ref. Level] in the [Main Menu] [Record Set]  
[Audio Set] menu to -20dB or -12dB . (common for  
B
B
A
B
A
B
[INPUT1]  
[INPUT2]  
Records audio from [INPUT1] terminal to CH-2.  
Records audio from [INPUT2] terminal to CH-2.  
46  
     
Using Stereo Type Earphone Jack  
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected, perform the  
following setting to output stereo sound.  
Note :  
When the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder is  
set to AONB, the recording level cannot be adjusted with  
the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2] adjustment knob.  
1
Set the [MONITOR SELECT] switch to ABOTHB.  
Automatic Adjustment Mode  
2 Set [Main Menu] B [A/V Out] B [Audio Monitor] to  
Set the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch on the camera  
recorder to AAUTOB or the [FULL AUTO] switch to AONB to  
enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The audio recording level  
is set automatically according to the input level.  
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to AONB, mode  
switching with the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch is  
disabled.  
Only audio from [CH-1] is output through the monitor  
speaker.  
Memo :  
You can set the volume of the alarm tone with  
[Alarm Level] in the [Main Menu] B [Others] menu.  
(AOffB/ALowB/AMiddleB/AHighB) (A Page 93)  
Memo :  
When [Audio] in the [Camera Function] B [FULL AUTO]  
menu is set to ASW SetB, you can switch the recording  
level mode with the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch  
on the camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO] switch is  
set to AONB. (A Page 81)  
Audio Monitor During Recording  
You can check the input audio with the monitor speaker or  
earphones.  
1 Select the channel to monitor with the  
[MONITOR SELECT] switch.  
[CH-1]  
Outputs audio from [INPUT1] terminal.  
[BOTH]  
Mixes and outputs audio from both [INPUT1/INPUT2]  
terminals.  
[CH-2]  
Outputs audio from [INPUT2] terminal.  
2 Adjust the volume of the monitor audio with the  
[MONITOR] adjustment knob.  
Monitor  
Speaker  
[PHONES]  
Terminal  
[MONITOR]  
Adjustment Knob  
[MONITOR SELECT]  
Switch  
Memo :  
Alarm tone is output when there is an abnormality in the  
camera recorder. Alarm tone is also output when the  
SDHC card is full or when the battery is low.  
Alarm tone is not output during recording.  
Note :  
Increasing the volume of the monitor too much may result  
in howling of the camera microphone.  
47  
 
Memo :  
Time Code and User’s Bit  
When [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to  
AInternalB, the built-in time code generator number is  
displayed.  
When [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to  
AExternalB, the value of the external time code generator  
input to the [TC IN] terminal is displayed.  
Time code display for [IEEE1394] input is not supported.  
Values recorded on the SDHC card is displayed in Media  
mode.  
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the video in  
this camera recorder.  
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the viewfinder  
and LCD screens during playback or recording.  
(Status screen)  
VIDEO Output  
Setting Display  
LCD/VF Display  
Display  
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit  
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the viewfinder  
and LCD screens during playback or recording.  
TC  
UB  
Time  
Code  
When [Main Menu] B  
[LCD/VF] B [Status  
Display] B [TC/UB] is set to [SDI Out Char.] in  
AOnB, time code or user’s  
When [Analog  
Out Char.] or  
User’s Bit  
the [A/V Out]  
menu is set to  
The display differs according to the menu settings.  
bit is displayed during the  
1 Set [Main Menu] B [LCD/VF] B [Status Display] B  
following status display and AOnB, time code  
information display mode of or user’s bit is  
[TC/UB] to AOnB. (A Page 91)  
the LCD screen.  
displayed in the  
respective video  
output images  
during the  
LCD/VF display  
setting on the left.  
Time code or user’s bit data is displayed on the status  
screen.  
STATUS 1 screen in  
Camera mode  
Time Code or User’s Bit  
STATUS 1, STATUS 2  
screens in Media mode (SD)  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
24p HQ  
Time Code Operation Mode  
Three types of time code operation can be selected with the  
[TC GENE.] switch. They are AFREEB, ARECB, and  
AREGENB.  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
S.DTL  
B -3  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
* The [TC GENE.] selection switch is enabled when  
[TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AInternalB.  
282min  
STATUS 1 Screen  
Setting  
Mode  
Description  
2 Select the display with the [TC DISPLAY] switch on  
FREE  
FreeRun The time code operates in the run mode at all  
mode  
times regardless of the recording status.  
It continues to run even when the power of the  
camera recorder is turned off. *  
the LCD monitor.  
Select time code display (TC) or user’s bit display (UB).  
REC  
RecRun The time code operates in the run mode during  
mode  
recording. It continues to run in the order of the  
recorded clips as long as the SDHC card is not  
replaced. If the SDHC card is removed and  
recording is made on another card, time code  
will be recorded on the new card from where it  
was left off in the previous card.  
REGEN Regen  
mode  
The time code operates in the run mode during  
recording. When the SDHC card is replaced,  
the last time code recorded on the card is read  
and recorded on a new card so that the time  
code continues in running order. (A Page 52)  
* When [Rec Mode] in the [Record Set] menu is set to  
AVariable FrameB, time code operation enters RecRun  
mode.  
[TC DISPLAY]  
Setting Switch  
[TC GENE.] Setting Switch  
48  
     
Memo :  
Using the Internal Time  
Code Generator  
Drop frame/non-drop frame mode  
When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu] B  
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [Frame & Bit Rate] is  
60 (30), the actual number of frames per second is  
approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the time code  
processing standard is 60 (30) frames. To make up for the  
frame number discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop)  
drops the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except for  
minutes that are multiples of 10.  
Presetting the Time Code  
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the internal  
time code generator are recorded.  
This section describes how to set [TC Preset] in the [TC/UB]  
On the other hand, the non-drop frame mode (Non Drop)  
does not drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with  
the actual time.  
[USER2] Button  
[TC GENE.] Setting Switch  
Memo :  
When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu] B  
[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [Frame & Bit Rate] is  
A50, 25, 24B, settings cannot be made in [Drop].  
You can configure the setting without accessing the [TC/UB]  
menu screen. ( Page 51)  
Required Settings Before Preset  
1
Set [Main Menu]  
B
[TC/UB]  
B
[TCG Source] to  
A
B
2 Set the [TC GENE.] switch to ARECB or AFREEB.  
[REC]  
Preset data in the time code generator operates in  
run mode during recording mode. Set this when  
recording continuous time code in connecting  
frames.  
[FREE]  
Time code starts to operate in run mode from the  
preset time in the time code generator.  
3 Select the framing mode for the time code generator  
(only when the frame rate setting is A60B or A30B).  
Set using [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [Drop].  
[Drop]  
Sets the run mode of the time code generator to drop  
frame mode.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on the  
recording time.  
[Non  
Drop]  
Sets the run mode of the time code generator to non-  
drop frame mode.  
Use this setting when placing emphasis on the  
number of frames.  
49  
     
Memo :  
Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to A0B. The  
cursor moves to the time digit (left).  
3 Check the values and press the Set button (R).  
The time code is set and the screen returns to [TC/UB].  
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.  
4 Press the [MENU] button.  
Returns to the normal screen.  
Setting Time Code  
[USER2] Button  
Presetting the User’s Bit  
You can add an 8-digit hexadecimal number as the user’s bit  
to the recorded image.  
[MENU] Button  
Set Button (R)  
[USER2] Button  
Cross-  
shaped  
button  
(JKH I)  
[MENU] Button  
Set Button (R)  
[CANCEL] Button  
Cross-  
shaped  
button  
(JKH I)  
1
Select [Main Menu]  
B
[TC/UB]  
B
[TC Preset] and press  
the Set button (R). (  
The [TC Preset] screen appears.  
[CANCEL] Button  
1
1 Set [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TCG Source] to  
2 Select [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [UB Preset] and  
press the Set button (R). (A Page 88)  
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.  
[TC/UB] Menu Screen  
Memo :  
1
When the [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB, the  
parameter is displayed as ARegenerationB and cannot be  
selected.  
When [Main Menu] B [TC/UB] B [TCG Source] is set to  
AExternalB, the parameter is displayed as AExternalB and  
cannot be selected.  
[TC/UB] Menu Screen  
2 Set the time code (hour, minute, second, frame).  
Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor at the  
item to set, then the cross-shaped button (JK) to change the  
values.  
Memo :  
When the [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB, the  
parameter is displayed as ARegenerationB and cannot be  
selected.  
When [Main Menu] B[TC/UB] B [TCG Source] is set to  
AExternalB, the parameter is displayed as AExternalB and  
cannot be selected.  
Cursor  
During non-drop frame  
[TC Preset] Screen  
(During drop frame)  
50  
 
3 Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor  
at the item to set, then use the cross-shaped button (JK)  
to change the values.  
Setting Time Code  
1
Hold down the [MENU] button and press the [USER1]  
button.  
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets between A and F  
can be specified for the user’s bit.  
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.  
Cursor  
Cursor  
[TC Preset] Screen  
(During drop frame)  
[UB Preset] Screen  
Memo :  
Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to  
cursor moves to the left.  
A0  
B. The  
2 Set the time code (hour, minute, second, frame).  
Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor at the  
item to set, then the cross-shaped button (JK) to change the  
values.  
4
Check the values and press the Set button (R).  
Memo :  
Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to  
cursor moves to the time digit (left).  
A0B. The  
The time code is set and the screen returns to [TC/UB].  
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.  
5 Press the [MENU] button.  
Returns to the normal screen.  
3 Check the values and press the Set button (R).  
The time code is set and the screen returns to the normal  
screen.  
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.  
Setting Time Code Without Opening the  
Menu  
Note :  
Editing will be canceled and the screen will close under the  
following situations.  
[USER1] Button  
[USER2] Button  
The [TC DISPLAY] switch is selected during editing.  
The camera recorder is switched to the Media mode.  
When editing time code, operations of the [USER1],  
[USER2], [USER3] buttons that are set in the [Main Menu]  
[MENU] Button  
B
Set Button (R)  
[Camera Function]  
B
[Switch Set] menu are disabled.  
[USER2] functions as the number reset button. (  
Cross-  
shaped  
button  
(JKH I)  
[CANCEL] Button  
Memo :  
Settings cannot be made in the following cases.  
[TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to  
[TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB.  
Menu screen is displayed.  
AExternalB.  
The camera recorder is not in the Camera mode.  
(Except AUX Mode)  
Required Settings Before Preset  
Set [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu to  
Set the [TC DISPLAY] switch to TC  
AInternalB.  
A
B.  
Set the [TC GENE.] switch to settings other than  
AREGENB.  
51  
 
Note :  
When editing time code, operations of the [USER1],  
[USER2], [USER3] buttons that are set in the  
[Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] menu  
are disabled. [USER2] functions as the number reset  
Setting User’s Bit Without Opening the Menu  
Memo :  
Recording Time Code in Continuation of  
the Recorded Time Code on SDHC card  
This camera recorder is equipped with the time code reader.  
Settings cannot be made in the following cases.  
[TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.  
[TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB.  
Menu screen is displayed.  
The camera recorder is not in Camera mode. (Except  
AUX mode)  
Required Settings Before Preset  
Set [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu to AInternalB.  
Set the [TC DISPLAY] switch to AUBB.  
Set the [TC GENE.] switch to settings other than AREGENB.  
[TC GENE.] Setting Switch  
Setting User’s Bit  
1
Set [Main Menu]  
B
[TC/UB]  
B
[TCG Source] to  
A
B
1 Hold down the [MENU] button and press the [USER1]  
button.  
2 Set the [TC GENE.] switch on the inner panel of the  
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.  
LCD to AREGENB.  
When the camera recorder enters from recording standby  
mode to recording mode, it reads the time code already  
recorded on the SDHC card and records the new time code  
in continuation of that value.  
Cursor  
The same data as the user’s bit already recorded on the  
SDHC card is recorded.  
Memo :  
When the [TC GENE.] switch is set to AREGENB, the  
framing mode of the time code follows the settings in  
[Drop] of the [TC/UB] menu instead of the clip settings.  
[UB Preset] Screen  
2 Set the user’s bit.  
Use the cross-shaped button (H I) to place the cursor at the item  
to set, then the cross-shaped button (JK) to change the values.  
Memo :  
Synchronizing Time Code  
with External Time Code  
Generator  
Press the [USER2] button to reset each digit to A0B. The  
cursor moves to the left.  
3 Check the values and press the Set button (R).  
The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to the normal  
screen.  
This camera recorder comes with a time code input terminal  
([TC IN]).  
An external time code generator can be connected to the  
[TC IN] terminal to enable synchronization with the SMPTE/  
EBU LTC time code.  
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL] button.  
Note :  
Editing will be canceled and the screen will close under  
the following situations.  
The [TC DISPLAY] switch is selected during editing.  
The camera recorder is switched to the Media mode.  
Memo :  
After synchronization (slave lock) is complete, the built-in  
time code generator continues to run even when there is  
no input from the external time code generator.  
52  
     
Connection  
Settings on the Camera Recorder  
1
Set to the Camera mode. (  
When connecting external time code generator  
to a master device  
2 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection switch to  
[GENLOCK/AUX] Switch  
AGENLOCKB. (U model)  
[GENLOCK/AUX INPUT] Terminal (U Model)  
[GENLOCK INPUT] Terminal (E Model)  
3 Set [Genlock Input] in the [Others] menu to ABNCB.  
4 Set [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu as follows.  
Slave Device  
Slave device  
: Set to AExternalB  
Master device : Set to AInternalB  
External Synchronizing Signal  
5 Set the LCD monitor or viewfinder as follows.  
To [TC IN]  
terminal of  
another camera  
Viewfinder  
: Set to the STATUS 1 screen display  
SYNC Signal Generator  
LCD monitor  
: Set to the enlarged status display  
External Synchronizing Signal  
The input and synchronizing status of the external time  
code generator are displayed as follows.  
External Time Code  
Generator  
LTC Time Code  
[TCG Source] : AExternalB  
Master Device  
Lights up  
Lights up  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
60p HQ  
OK  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
1
Input the external synchronizing signal to the external  
time code generator and the [GENLOCK/AUX INPUT]  
terminal of this camera recorder.  
CH1  
CH2  
DD  
20 min  
DF  
EXT  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
SKIN AREA  
Make use of BB signal or HDTV 3 level synchronizing signal  
as the external synchronizing signal.  
S.DTL  
B -3  
DD  
1280 x 720  
60p HQ  
STBY  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
A
min  
100min  
67.8min  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
B 123 min  
OK  
282min  
Enlarged Status Display Screen  
Status Screen  
Note :  
If the power of the camera recorder is turned ON/OFF  
during input of the external synchronizing signal, the  
screen may be disrupted for a few seconds. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Camera Recorder Operation  
1
Set the external time code generator or master device,  
and run the time code.  
2 Input the SMTPE/EBU LTC time code from the  
external time code generator to the [TC IN] terminal of  
this camera recorder.  
When the built-in time code generator is synchronized  
with the input of the external time code generator, L on  
the STATUS 1 screen or enlarged status display screen  
will light up.  
If the time code is not synchronized or when there is no  
time code input, L does not light up.  
When connecting multiple units of this camera  
recorder with one as the master and the rest as  
slave devices  
[TCG Source] : AExternalB  
Slave Device  
Master Device  
Lights up  
Lights up  
[Y/VIDEO] Output Terminal  
[GENLOCK/AUX INPUT] Terminal  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
60p HQ  
OK  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
CH1  
CH2  
DD  
20 min  
DF  
EXT  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
SKIN AREA  
S.DTL  
B -3  
DD  
1280 x 720  
60p HQ  
STBY  
A
B
100min  
100min  
A
min  
100min  
67.8min  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
B 123 min  
OK  
STBY  
282min  
Enlarged Status Display Screen  
Status Screen  
[TC IN] Terminal  
Memo :  
[TC OUT] Terminal  
After synchronization is complete, the built-in time code  
generator will continue to run even when the external time  
code generator or master device is disconnected.  
The user’s bit becomes the data of the external time code  
generator or master device.  
1
Connect the [TC OUT] terminal of the master device to  
the [TC IN] terminal of the slave device.  
2 Connect the [Y/VIDEO] terminal of the master device  
to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal of the slave device.  
53  
Memo :  
Setting Zebra Pattern  
ATop2B and ABottom2B cannot be set if [Zebra] is set to  
A1PatternB.  
When the specified range of two zebra patterns overlaps,  
the two zebra patterns overlap and are displayed in a grid.  
When the luminance level range for displaying zebra patterns  
is specified, diagonal lines (zebra pattern) are displayed at  
areas with the specified luminance levels during shooting.  
Specify the brightness (luminance) level  
range for displaying zebra pattern  
3 Display the zebra pattern.  
Set the [ZEBRA ON/OFF] switch in front of the camera  
recorder to AONB to display the zebra pattern at the specified  
range.  
Zebra Pattern  
[ZEBRA ON/OFF] Switch  
Specify the upper (Top1, Top2) and lower (Bottom1,  
Bottom2) limits of the luminance level.  
1
Set the zebra display pattern.  
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF] menu B  
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].  
[Zebra1] Display  
[Zebra2] Display  
2 Specify the brightness (luminance) level range for  
displaying zebra pattern.  
Specify the upper (Top1, Top2) and lower (Bottom1,  
Bottom2) limits of the luminance level in [LCD/VF] menu B  
[Shooting Assist] B [Zebra].  
Item  
Zebra  
Settings  
Options  
1Pattern  
Zebra display pattern  
2Patterns  
Top1  
Upper luminance limit for  
displaying [Zebra1]  
5 % - 100 %, Over  
(in 5 % increments)  
Bottom1  
Top2  
Lower luminance limit for  
displaying [Zebra1]  
0 % - 100 %  
(in 5 % increments)  
Upper luminance limit for  
displaying [Zebra2]  
5 % - 100 %, Over  
(in 5 % increments)  
Bottom2  
Lower luminance limit for  
displaying [Zebra2]  
0 % - 100 %  
(in 5 % increments)  
54  
 
3 Flip the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch of the  
Setting Spot Meter  
camera recorder.  
The operation switches as below when the [SKIN AREA/  
SPOT METER] switch is flipped.  
When [Max&Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected  
The brightness of the object during shooting is displayed.  
This function is useful when setting video or stage lighting or  
when specifying camera exposure.  
A cursor indicating the location and the brightness (%) of that  
location are displayed in the images shown on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screens.  
A [SPOT METER ON] is displayed when the switch is  
flipped. Cursors appear according to the settings. The  
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest (Min) areas  
in the screen are automatically detected with regard to  
the changes of the object, and the brightness of these  
areas is displayed.  
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output video  
This function allows you to check the brightness of input  
images from the lens without depending on image  
processing such as gamma curve. The dynamic range of  
the camera recorder is 300 % and a brightness range of  
0 % to 300 % and above is displayed.  
Cursor  
([Max] : Green)  
Cursor  
([Min] : Yellow)  
Memo :  
Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra display  
range. When [Gamma] in the [Camera Process] menu is  
set to ACinemaB or AFilm OutB, the 100IRE output is not  
consistent with the 100 % display. (A Page 83)  
When an object of more than 300 % luminance is  
detected, it is displayed as 300 %.  
B [SPOT METER FIXED] is displayed when the switch is  
flipped. Automatic detection stops. Frames are fixed at  
the stopped positions and the brightness is displayed.  
Set Button (R)  
Cursor  
([Max] : Green)  
Cross-shaped  
Button  
(
JKH I)  
Cursor  
([Min] : Yellow)  
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] Switch  
C [SPOT METER OFF] is displayed when the switch is  
1
Select  
ASpot MeterB in [SKIN A./SPOT M.] of the [Main  
flipped. Displays of cursors and brightness disappear.  
Menu] [Camera Function]  
B
B
[Switch Set] menu. (  
2
Select one of the following from [SPOT METER]. (  
Color of Frame  
Indicating the Position  
Item  
Settings  
[Max&Min] Displays the brightness (%) [Max] : Green  
[Min] : Yellow  
and positions of the  
brightest and darkest areas  
in the screen. Frames may  
also be stopped at the  
current positions.  
[Max]  
Displays the brightness (%) Green  
and position of the brightest  
area in the screen. Frames  
may also be stopped at the  
current positions.  
D Returns to the state in A.  
[Min]  
Displays the brightness (%) Yellow  
and position of the darkest  
area in the screen. Frame  
may also be stopped at the  
current positions.  
[Manual]  
Displays the brightness (%) Green  
of the specified position.  
(Blinks in red when  
specifying the position)  
55  
 
Viewing Recorded Videos  
Immediately (Clip Review)  
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip on the  
screen.  
When [Manual] is selected  
A [SPOT METER FIXED] is displayed when the switch is  
However, the video clip cannot be played back if the settings  
of the camera recorder are different from the video format  
(Camera Resolution/Frame & Bit Rate) of the clip.  
flipped. The brightness of the cursor position is displayed.  
Memo :  
To use this function, assign AClip ReviewB to any of the  
[USER1], [USER2], [USER3] buttons or the [RET] button  
on the lens.  
Cursor (Green)  
* [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] B  
[LENS RET]/[USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] B  
AClip ReviewB(A Page 79)  
B [SPOT METER OFF] is displayed when the switch is  
flipped. Displays of cursors and brightness disappear.  
[RET] Button  
W
T
R E T  
A
M
I R I S  
C [SPOT METER SELECT] is displayed when the switch is  
flipped. The cursor blinks in red.  
Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to  
specify the position to display the brightness. When the  
position is decided, press the Set button (R) or flip the  
switch to confirm.  
1 Press the button assigned with the AClip ReviewB  
function during standby (ASTBYB is displayed).  
Playback of the configured section starts.  
Memo :  
The video clip is played back according to the [Clip Review]  
settings in the [Camera Function] menu. By default setting  
(Last 5 sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip is played back.  
Cursor  
(Blinks in red)  
When playback is complete, the camera recorder exits Clip  
Review and returns to STBY (recording standby) mode.  
A
B
D Returns to the state in A.  
Memo :  
When moving the cursor position, [SHUTTER]/  
[AE LEVEL] control is disabled.  
You can also decide the position of the cursor with the Set  
button (R).  
When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen, the frame  
is fixed in the center.  
If the cursor is outside the  
[Aspect Ratio] item in the [Record Format] menu from  
16:9 to 4:3 restores the cursor to the default position.  
A4:3B range, changing the  
A
B
A
B
56  
 
Note :  
Assigning Functions to  
User Buttons  
During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and [REC]  
buttons are enabled. Press the [CANCEL] button to  
cancel clip review and return to ASTBYB (recording  
standby) mode. Press the [REC] button to cancel clip  
review and enter recording mode. It will take some time to  
start recording after the button is pressed.  
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the whole clip is  
played back.  
You can assign functions to the [USER1], [USER2], and  
[USER3] buttons.  
By assigning functions to the [USER1], [USER2], and  
[USER3] buttons, the usability of the camera recorder is  
enhanced.  
Only video clips in the currently selected slot can be  
reviewed.  
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip Review  
function is disabled.  
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip Continuous Rec is  
paused (STBYC, yellow text). To operate Clip Review,  
use the [CANCEL] button to set to ASTBYCB (white text)  
[USER1], [USER2], [USER3]  
Buttons  
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera recorder is  
connected to an external equipment and the equipment is  
in recording state.  
1 Assign functions to the [USER1], [USER2], and  
[USER3] buttons from the menu. (A Page 79)  
Set each of the [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3] items in  
the [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B [Switch Set] menu.  
Memo :  
Operations of the [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3]  
buttons are interlocked with the menu settings.  
When the menu screen is displayed, these buttons  
function as the menu operation buttons.  
57  
 
Protecting Important  
Scenes (OK Mark Function)  
Special Recording  
You can append OK marks to the clips for important scenes.  
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be deleted, thus  
protecting the important clips. In addition, you can display  
only the clips with OK marks in the thumbnail display during  
Media mode.  
Besides the normal recording mode, three special recording  
methods are available in this camera recorder. They are Pre  
Rec, Clip Continuous Rec, and Variable Frame Rec.  
Select the mode from [Rec Mode] in the [Record Set] menu.  
* Set using [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode].  
Appending OK Marks During Recording  
Pre Rec  
1 Assign the AOK MarkB function to the [RET] button on  
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec Time], you  
can start recording video and audio before actual recording  
starts based on the Pre Rec Time setting.  
When starting actual recording while the camera recorder is  
in Recording Standby (STBYP) mode, you can start  
recording a few seconds earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time]  
setting.  
the lens from the menu.  
Select [Main Menu] B [Camera Function] B  
[Switch Set] B [LENS RET] B AOK MarkB. (A Page 79)  
Append or delete the [OK] mark with every press of the  
[RET] button.  
When an OK mark is appended, AOKB appears at the top  
left of the status screen on the viewfinder/LCD monitor.  
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete event without  
missing the initial scenes even if you start the recording late.  
* Pre Rec Time can be set to A5secB, A10secB, or A20secB  
in [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Pre Rec Time].  
AOKB Mark  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
60p HQ  
OK  
Completed Clip  
(Recorded video and audio)  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
S.DTL  
B -3  
Recording starts a  
number of seconds  
earlier based on  
the [Pre Rec Time]  
setting  
A
B
REC  
100min  
100min  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
282min  
Press [REC]  
(Recording starts)  
Press [REC]  
(Recording stops)  
STATUS 1 Screen  
Memo :  
1 Set [Rec Mode] to APre RecB. (A Page 76)  
Clips appended with [OK Mark] cannot be deleted from  
the camera recorder using [Delete Clip]. (However, they  
will be deleted when the SDHC card is formatted.)  
When the camera recorder is in Media mode (SD Card  
mode), you can delete the [OK] marks appended during  
recording, or append/delete [OK] marks after shooting.  
Set [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] to  
APre RecB.  
The status display changes from ASTBYB B ASTBYPB.  
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording in Pre Rec  
mode.  
Note :  
The status display changes from ASTBYPB B ARECPB  
and the card slot status indicator lights up in red.  
Press the [REC] button again to pause recording. The  
display changes from ARECPB B ASTBYPB and the card  
slot status indicator lights up in green.  
When the write-protect switch on the SDHC card is set  
(
is displayed), [OK] marks cannot be appended/  
deleted.  
Note :  
When the interval between start and stop recording is  
short, ASTBYPB may not be displayed immediately after  
recording is complete.  
ARECPB B ASTBYPB (STBY blinks in red) B ASTBYPB  
is displayed.  
When the SDHC card becomes full during recording,  
recording stops and ASTOPPB is displayed.  
58  
     
4 Resume recording. (Recording 2)  
Press the [REC] button again to resume recording. The  
display changes from STBY (yellow text) REC  
Note :  
Video and audio before the above mentioned time may not  
be recorded after recording starts in the following cases.  
A
CB  
B
A
CB.  
The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.  
Immediately after power on  
Immediately after recording stops  
Immediately after switching from Media mode to  
Camera mode  
Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]  
Immediately after the end of Clip Review  
Immediately after changing file format  
Immediately after changing video format  
5 Pause recording.  
Press the [REC] button again to pause recording. The display  
changes from  
AREC  
CB  
B
ASTBYCB  
(yellow text).  
The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.  
6 Resume recording. (Recording 3)  
Press the [REC] button again to resume recording. The  
display changes from STBY (yellow text) REC  
A
CB  
B
A
CB.  
Clip Continuous Rec  
The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.  
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the image,  
audio, and accompanying data from the start till the end of  
the recording are recorded as one AclipB on the SDHC card.  
This mode allows you to consolidate several rounds of Astart-  
stop recordingB into one clip.  
7 Press and hold the [REC] button.  
Recording stops and the display changes from  
AREC  
CB  
B
ASTBY  
CB. A AclipB is generated.  
The card slot status indicator lights up in green.  
Example : In normal recording, three clips are generated as  
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.  
However, recording in this mode generates only  
one clip.  
8 Press the [REC] button again.  
The status display changes from ASTBYCB B ARECCB  
and the card slot status indicator lights up in red.  
A new AclipB is generated from here.  
Press [REC]  
(Recording starts)  
Press [REC]  
(Recording resumes)  
Memo :  
Press [REC]  
(Recording resumes)  
The following operations cannot be performed while  
recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).  
Clip Review operation (A Page 56)  
Switching SDHC card slots  
Switching operation mode (A Page 8)  
Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)  
regardless of the menu settings.  
Press [REC]  
(Recording pauses)  
Press [REC]  
(Recording pauses)  
Press [REC]  
(Recording stops)  
Recording 1  
Recording 2  
Recording 3  
Completed Clip  
(Recorded video and audio)  
Note :  
Do not remove the SDHC card during recording (RECC,  
red text) or recording pause (STBYC, yellow text).  
To remove the SDHC card in AClip ContinuousB mode,  
press the [CANCEL] button, check that ASTBYCB (white  
text) is displayed and the card slot status indicator is  
lighted in green before you remove the card.  
When the SDHC card becomes full during recording,  
recording stops and ASTOPCB is displayed.  
When the [POWER] switch is turned off during recording  
or recording pause, recording stops and power is cut off  
after a clip is generated.  
Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3  
1
Set [Rec Mode] to AClip ContinuousB.  
Set [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] to  
AClip ContinuousB. (A Page 76)  
The status display changes from  
A
STBY  
B
B
ASTBYCB.  
2 Start recording. (Recording 1)  
If the power is cut off due to low battery power, a proper  
clip may not be generated.  
Press the [REC] button to start recording in Clip Continuous  
mode.  
The status display changes from ASTBYCB B ARECCB  
and the card slot status indicator lights up in red.  
3 Pause recording.  
Press the [REC] button again to pause recording. The display  
changes from  
ARECCB  
B
ASTBY  
CB  
(yellow text).  
The card slot status indicator remains lighted in red.  
Memo :  
When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the camera  
recorder is paused (STBY  
C
A
), the display changes from  
STBY (blinking yellow text)  
clip is generated. The card slot  
ASTBYCB  
(yellow text)  
B
CB  
B
ASTBYCB  
(white text). A  
A
B
status indicator lights up in green.  
59  
 
Note :  
The recording frame rate cannot be changed during  
recording. To change the frame rate, stop the recording  
first and perform the change.  
When the [TC GENE.] switch located on the inner panel of  
the LCD is set to AFREEB, videos are recorded in Rec  
(RecRun) time code.  
Audio cannot be recorded. A  
level meter display. (A Page 104)  
mark appears in the audio  
Variable Frame Rec  
Shooting in this mode allows you to obtain smooth slow  
motion or quick motion videos.  
Using different frame rate settings for recording and  
playback, videos captured at normal speed can be played  
back more smoothly than those in low or high speed  
playback.  
Depending on the settings, images beyond the recording  
stop position may be recorded and it may take time for the  
camera recorder to enter ASTBYB mode.  
To enable Variable Frame Rec, the following two settings are  
required at the same time.  
[Camera Resolution] in the [Record Format] menu is set to  
1280x720  
[Frame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format] menu is set to  
30p (HQ) 24p (HQ) , or 25p (HQ)  
A
B.  
A
B
,
A
B
A
B.  
Number of Frames that can be Set  
1
Set [Camera Resolution] to  
A1280x720B, then set  
[Frame & Bit Rate]. ( Page 76)  
Set [Frame & Bit Rate] to A30p (HQ)B, A24p (HQ)B, or A25p  
(HQ)B.  
2 Set [Rec Mode] to AVariable FrameB. (A Page 76)  
Set [Main Menu] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] to  
AVariable FrameB.  
3 Select a recording frame rate from [Frame Rate].  
The selectable frame rates are as shown below.  
Record Format  
Selectable Shooting Frame Rate  
1280x720 30p (HQ) 10  
12  
10  
^
15  
12  
10  
20  
24 30  
40 48 60  
^
24p (HQ)  
25p (HQ)  
^
^
15  
20 24  
30 40 48 60  
12.5 20 25  
Standard  
40 50  
^
^
Effect during playback  
Quick motion  
Slow motion  
Memo :  
When [AE LEVEL] in the [Main Menu]  
B
[Camera Function]  
B
[Switch Set] menu is set to  
AAE LEVEL/VFRB, you can use the  
cross-shaped button (H I) to select the frame rate during  
Variable Frame Rec. In modes other than Variable Frame Rec,  
the cross-shaped button (H I) functions as the [AE LEVEL]  
setting button. (  
60  
 
Playback  
Playing Back Recorded  
Clips  
Thumbnail Screen  
The thumbnail screen is available in “No Detailed Properties  
(4x3 thumbnails)” and “Detailed Properties (4x1 thumbnails)”  
displays.  
Use the thumbnail menu [Detailed Properties] to switch  
The first frame of the recorded clip on the SDHC card is  
displayed as the thumbnail.  
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording from the  
oldest to most recent.  
To play back clips recorded on SDHC cards, switch to the  
Media mode (SD Card mode).  
Press the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button in Camera mode to  
enter SD Card mode. A thumbnail screen of the clips  
recorded on the SDHC card is displayed.  
You can play back the selected clip on the thumbnail screen.  
No Detailed Properties (4x3 Thumbnails)  
Memo :  
When an SDHC card without any clips is inserted,  
ANo ClipsB is displayed.  
Screen  
D
E
F
C
B
Operation Buttons  
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel of the  
camera recorder to operate the thumbnail screen.  
A
G
C
D
B
A
H
I
J
E
F
Name  
A Cursor  
Description  
Indicates the selected clip. Use the cross-  
shaped button (JKH I) to move the cursor.  
After power is turned on and SDHC card is  
inserted, or when the camera recorder is  
switched to Media mode (SD Card mode),  
the cursor is positioned on top of the latest  
clip.  
When the camera recorder changes to the  
thumbnail screen during playback, the cursor  
is positioned on the clip that was played  
back. If you play back the same clip again, it  
will continue from where it was left off.  
The default position of the cursor when  
SDHC card slot is switched is on the  
previously selected clip before the switch.  
Name  
Description  
Displays the thumbnail screen menu.  
Press this button to close the menu  
screen during menu display and return  
to the normal screen.  
A [MENU] Button  
Appends (or deletes) an OK mark on  
the selected clip.  
B [USER1] Button  
Example of the moving order of the cursor  
(total 22 clips)  
Deletes the selected clip.  
C [USER2] Button  
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)  
Plays back the selected clip.  
D Set (Play) Button  
J : Moves the cursor upward.  
K : Moves the cursor downward.  
H : Moves back to the previous item.  
I : Moves forward to the next item.  
(To enter sub-menus or display  
pop-up menus.)  
E Cross-Shaped  
Button (JKH I)  
Scrolls  
page  
Cancels settings and returns to the  
previous screen.  
Stops video playback.  
F [CANCEL] (Stop)  
Button  
61  
         
Name  
D Video  
Description  
Displays the video format (Camera  
Resolution/Frame Rate) that allows playback  
and thumbnail display.  
Format  
Five types including [1080/60i, 30p, 24p],  
[1080/50i, 25p], [720/60p, 30p, 24p],  
[720/50p, 25p], [480/60i] (U model) and  
[576/50i] (E model). Clips of other video  
formats are represented in alternative  
display. Clips that are in alternative display  
cannot be played back with the current video  
format settings.  
A
B
D
E
F
C
B
A
G
A A clip with corrupted management  
information. It cannot be played back  
even if you press the playback button.  
H
I
B
A clip that cannot be played back nor  
displayed in thumbnail with the current  
video format settings. It cannot be played  
back even if you press the playback  
button. The format of the clip is displayed.  
J
Name  
Description  
* Depends on the settings in [Record Set]  
[Record Format] [System Definition],  
[Camera Resolution], and [Frame & Bit Rate]  
items of the [Main Menu] screen.  
B
Displays the status of the inserted SDHC  
card, selected SDHC card, write-protect  
switch, and the need for restoring.  
Use the [SLOT SELECT] switch to switch  
slots. Clips in slot A and B cannot be  
displayed at the same time.  
B SDHC Card  
B
Displays the [running number/total number of  
clips] of the displayed clips.  
E Number of  
Clips  
: Write-protect switch of the SDHC card  
in slot A is set.  
: SDHC card in slot B needs to be  
restored or formatted, or is an  
unsupported SDHC card.  
: Ample battery power.  
: Slightly reduced battery power.  
: Low battery power.  
: Empty battery power. (Blinks in red)  
: External power supply connected.  
F Remaining  
Battery  
Power  
Shows the file format of the currently  
displayed clips.  
Only clips with the resolution (AHD  
(MPEG2)B or ASD (DV)B) selected in [System  
Definition] are displayed. (A Page 75)  
C File Format  
Memo :  
If the battery in use is not a recommended  
one, the battery mark which indicates the  
battery level may not appear.  
* Depends on the settings in [Record Set] B  
[Record Format] B [File Format] on the  
[Main Menu] screen. (A Page 75)  
Indicates the scroll position.  
G Scroll Bar  
When there is a black space below the scroll  
bar (white), this indicates further pages.  
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,  
this indicates the last page.  
62  
Name  
Description  
Displays the time code or date/time at the  
start of clip recording. Date/time is displayed  
in the local time of the shooting location.  
Set whether to display ATCB or ADate/TimeB  
in the thumbnail menu [Thumbnail Text].  
H Thumbnail  
Text  
Data/time display depends on the settings in  
[LCD/VF] B [Status Display] B [Date Style] of  
Time is displayed in 24-hour display  
regardless of the [Time Style] setting.  
Displays clip information (properties).  
I Clip Mark  
A
B
C
A OK Mark  
Clip is appended with OK mark.  
Memo :  
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be  
deleted on the camera recorder.  
B
Continued From Mark  
This mark indicates that the current clip is  
continued from another SDHC card when  
recording is divided and made on several  
SDHC cards.  
C
Continue Mark  
This mark indicates that the current clip will  
continue to another SDHC card when  
recording is divided and made on several  
SDHC cards.  
Guide for the current operation buttons.  
J Operation  
Guide  
Moves the clip cursor to the top/bottom/left/  
right.  
Plays back the selected clip.  
Appends an OK mark to the selected clip.  
This is displayed when an OK mark is not  
appended to the clip. (A Page 68)  
Memo :  
This is disabled when the SDHC card is  
locked. (Displayed in gray)  
Deletes the OK mark from the selected clip.  
This is displayed when an OK mark is  
appended to the clip. (A Page 69)  
Memo :  
This is disabled when the SDHC card is  
locked. (Displayed in gray)  
Deletes the selected clip.  
63  
Name  
Description  
Shows the detailed properties of the selected  
clip. The following information is displayed.  
C Detailed  
Properties  
File Format  
Clip Name  
Resolution  
Frame Rate  
Bit Rate  
: File format  
: Clip name  
: Image size  
: Frame rate  
: Bit rate  
Audio  
: Audio format  
: Time code at the start of  
recording  
Start TC  
End TC  
: Time code at the end of  
recording  
Detailed Properties (4x1 Thumbnails)  
Screen  
Duration  
UB  
: Clip length  
: User’s bit  
Creation Date : Date created  
Memo :  
The information of time and date displays  
in the following order, Year, Month, Date,  
Time, Minute, Second and Time zone.  
A
B
A-B is the break character between Year,  
Month and Date for each, and A:B is the  
break character between Time, Minute and  
Second for each, and ATB is the break  
character Date and Time.  
C
AZB  
displays behind Time when Time zone is  
set to UTC+00:00  
A
B.  
D
(Time and date display example)  
In case of AUTC+00:00B 21:18:50 on  
March 4th in 2009 (Western European  
time zone):  
Name  
Description  
Indicates the selected clip. Use the cross-  
shaped button (H I) to move the cursor.  
After power is turned on and SDHC card is  
inserted, or when the camera recorder is  
switched to Media mode (SD Card mode),  
the cursor is positioned on top of the latest  
clip.  
A Cursor  
A2009-03-04T21:18:50ZB  
In case of AUTC-05:00B 10:13:15 on  
March 19th in 2009 (North American  
Eastern time zone).  
A2009-03-19T10:13:15-05:00B  
Variable Frame : Variable frame (only in  
Variable Frame Rec)  
When the camera recorder changes to the  
thumbnail screen during playback, the cursor  
is positioned on the clip that was played  
back. If you play back the same clip again, it  
will continue from where it was left off.  
The default position of the cursor when  
SDHC card slot is switched is on the  
Guide for the current operation buttons.  
D Operation  
Guide  
Moves the clip cursor to the left/right.  
Plays back the selected clip.  
previously selected clip before the switch.  
Appends an OK mark to the selected clip.  
This is displayed when an OK mark is not  
appended to the clip. (A Page 68)  
Example of the moving order of the cursor  
(total 6 clips)  
Memo :  
This is disabled when the SDHC card is  
locked. (Displayed in gray)  
Scrolls page  
Deletes the OK mark from the selected clip.  
This is displayed when an OK mark is  
appended to the clip. (A Page 69)  
Indicates the scroll position.  
B Scroll Bar  
When there is a black space on the right of  
the scroll bar (white), this indicates further  
pages.  
When the scroll bar (white) is at the right end,  
this indicates the last page.  
Memo :  
This is disabled when the SDHC card is  
locked. (Displayed in gray)  
Deletes the selected clip. (A Page 66)  
64  
 
Thumbnail Menu  
Playing Back  
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel of the  
camera recorder to play back.  
Press the [MENU] button during thumbnail display to display  
the thumbnail menu.  
Press the [MENU] button during menu display to cancel the  
settings and exit the menu.  
A
B
Thumbnail Menu  
Sub-Menu  
C
Name  
Description  
Plays back/pauses the selected clip.  
A
B
Button  
Thumbnail Menu Screen  
Skips in the reverse or forward  
direction.  
Button  
Button  
Button  
Item  
Function  
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward  
direction.  
Media info  
Displays the information screen of the SDHC  
card.  
Stops playback.  
C
Detailed  
Properties  
For selecting the display method of the  
thumbnail screen.  
If a check is selected, the thumbnail screen will be  
displayed as [Detailed Properties (4x1 Thumbnail)  
1
Select the clip to play back on the thumbnail screen.  
Select the clip to play back with the cross-shaped  
Screen]. (  
button (JKH I).  
Thumbnail Text For selecting the display method for the  
thumbnail text on the thumbnail screen.  
2 Press the playback/pause button.  
Playback of the selected clip starts.  
TC  
Displays the recording start time code at the  
thumbnail text display area (below the thumbnail).  
Date/Time  
Displays the recording start date/time at the  
thumbnail text display area (below the thumbnail).  
Delete Clip  
One Clip  
All Clips  
Main Menu...  
Exit  
For deleting clips. (A Page 66)  
Deletes the selected clip.  
Time Code Playback  
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SDHC card can be  
displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
Deletes all clips that are displayed.  
Opens the [Main Menu] screen. (A Page 74)  
Exits and closes the menu.  
Memo :  
When [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the [A/V Out] menu is set to  
AHD-SDIB or ASD-SDIB, time code is also output from the  
[HD/SD-SDI] output terminal. (A Page 92)  
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal is  
used as a flag to determine valid video signals. Therefore,  
accurate values will not be output.  
If a section without time code is played back, the time  
code will stop. However, playback will continue.  
65  
       
2 Press the [USER2] button.  
A screen to confirm deletion appears.  
Deleting Clips  
3 Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped button (JK),  
and press the Set button (R).  
Deleting starts.  
For deleting clips.  
[USER2] Button  
[MENU] Button  
Set Button (R)  
3
Cross-shaped  
Button  
(
JKH I)  
[CANCEL] Button  
Memo :  
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be deleted on the  
camera recorder.  
Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.  
Deleting One Clip  
You can delete a selected clip with any of the following  
operations.  
A Press [USER2] button when menu is not displayed.  
Memo :  
B Perform [Delete Clip] B [One Clip] in thumbnail menu.  
Button operations are unavailable during deletion. The  
deleting operation cannot be canceled.  
Memo :  
The cursor moves to the next clip (or previous clip if a next  
clip does not exist) after deletion.  
A clip cannot be deleted with the [USER2] button and  
menu operation ([Delete Clip] B [One Clip]) under the  
following situations.  
A clip with OK mark is selected.  
Write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set (  
displayed).  
is  
Deleting with [Delete Clip] B [One Clip] in the  
menu  
1
Select the clip to delete.  
Select the clip to delete with the cross-shaped  
During Thumbnail Screen  
button (JKH I).  
Deleting with [USER2] button  
1
Select the clip to delete.  
1
Select the clip to delete with the cross-shaped  
button (JKH I).  
1
2 Press the [MENU] button.  
The thumbnail menu screen appears.  
3 Select [Delete Clip] B [One Clip] and press the Set  
button (R).  
A screen to confirm deletion appears.  
66  
 
4 Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped button (JK),  
and press the Set button (R).  
Deleting starts.  
3
Deleting All Clips  
Deletes all clips that are displayed.  
Memo :  
Button operations are unavailable during deletion. The  
deleting operation cannot be canceled.  
The cursor moves to the next clip (or previous clip if a next  
clip does not exist) after deletion.  
1
Press the [MENU] button.  
The thumbnail menu screen appears.  
2 Select [Delete Clip] B [All Clips] in the menu.  
A screen to confirm deletion appears.  
During Playback or Pause Screen  
3 Select [Delete] and press the Set button (R).  
Deleting with [USER2] button  
Deleting starts.  
1
Press [USER2] button during clip playback.  
Memo :  
A screen to confirm deletion appears.  
Button operations are unavailable during deletion. The  
deleting operation cannot be canceled.  
The time taken to delete clips depends on the number of  
clips to be deleted.  
2 Select [Delete] and press the Set button (R).  
Deleting starts.  
2
67  
Appending and Deleting  
OK Marks  
OK Mark  
You can append OK marks to the clips for important scenes.  
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be deleted, thus  
protecting the important clips.  
When the camera recorder is in Media mode (SD Card  
mode), you can delete the OK marks appended during  
recording, or append/delete OK marks after shooting.  
Memo :  
The [USER1] button is disabled (displayed in gray) and  
OK marks cannot be appended when the write-protect  
[USER1] Button  
switch of the SDHC card is set (  
is displayed).  
AOK Mark Added...B is displayed when changing marks  
and other operations are unavailable.  
[MENU] Button  
Set Button (R)  
During Playback or Pause Screen  
Cross-shaped  
Button  
1 Press [USER1] button during clip playback.  
(
JKH I)  
An OK mark is appended to the clip.  
[CANCEL] Button  
Appending OK Marks  
During Thumbnail Screen  
1 Select a clip without an OK mark and press the  
[USER1] button.  
An OK mark is appended to the clip.  
1
OK Mark  
Memo :  
The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended or deleted  
during playback.  
68  
   
During Playback or Pause Screen  
Deleting OK Marks  
1 Press the [USER1] button when playing back a clip  
During Thumbnail Screen  
appended with OK mark.  
The OK mark is deleted.  
1 Select a clip to delete OK mark and press the [USER1]  
button.  
The OK mark is deleted.  
1
Memo :  
The [USER1] button is disabled (displayed in gray) and  
OK marks cannot be deleted when the write-protect  
switch of the SDHC card is set (  
is displayed).  
AOK Mark Added...B/AOK Mark Deleted...B is displayed  
when changing marks and other operations are  
unavailable.  
69  
 
Menu Display and Detailed Settings  
Name  
Description  
Basic Operations in Menu  
Screen  
J : Moves the cursor upward.  
E Cross-shaped  
K : Moves the cursor downward.  
H : Moves back to the previous item.  
I : Moves forward to the next item.  
Button (JKH I)  
Cancels settings and returns to the  
previous screen.  
F [CANCEL] Button  
Press the [MENU] button on the side control panel of the  
camera recorder to display the menu screen on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder.  
Various settings for shooting and playback can be configured  
on the menu screen.  
Switches between the [Main Menu] and  
[Favorites Menu] screens.  
G [STATUS] Button  
There are two types of menu screens - [Main Menu] and  
[Favorites Menu].  
[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the camera  
recorder, classified according to functions and uses, while  
[Favorites Menu] allows users to customize the menu items  
The operating procedures and main screen displays are the  
same for both menus.  
Display and Description of the Menu  
Screen  
Selecting Menu Items  
The menu screen can also be displayed on external monitors  
connected to the video signal output terminal.  
F
G
A
B
H
I
C
D
Operation Buttons  
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel of the  
camera recorder to operate the menu.  
J
K
E
Name  
Description  
Recording, playback, etc. Displays the  
current status.  
A Status Display  
Same display as the status screen.  
During Camera mode :  
During Media mode (SD Card mode) :  
Name  
Description  
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-  
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor.  
B Cursor  
Displays the menu screen. ([Main  
Menu] is displayed by default when  
pressed.)  
A [MENU] Button  
Displays the names of the menu item and  
sub-menu.  
C Menu Item  
During normal usage, [Main Menu] is  
displayed if the previous menu  
operation ended at [Main Menu], and  
[Favorites Menu] if the previous menu  
operation ended at [Favorites Menu].  
Press this button to close the menu  
screen during menu display and return  
to the normal screen.  
Menu items with [...] after them indicates  
that there is a sub-menu to access.  
Items that cannot be changed are displayed  
in gray and cannot be selected.  
D Fixed Item  
E [Back] Back  
F Menu Title  
Select [Back] and press the Set button (R)  
to return to the previous level.  
Title of the currently displayed menu.  
Adds the selected menu or submenu  
item to the [Favorites Menu].  
B [USER1] Button  
C [USER2] Button  
D Set Button (R)  
: Ample battery power.  
: Slightly reduced battery power.  
: Low battery power.  
: Empty battery power. (Blinks in red)  
: External power supply connected.  
G Remaining  
Battery Power  
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or  
[UB Preset] setting screen. This button  
is disabled in other screens.  
Memo :  
Sets the values and items.  
If the battery in use is not a  
recommended one, the battery mark  
which indicates the battery level may not  
appear.  
70  
       
A
Name  
Description  
Indicates the current menu type with the  
line color.  
H Header  
B
C
Blue  
: [Main Menu] Screen  
Green : [Favorites Menu]  
(Operation screen)  
Magenta : [Favorites Menu]  
(Editing screen)  
F
Indicates the scroll position.  
I Scroll Bar  
G
H
Setting values for the menu items.  
For menus with sub-menus, values are not  
displayed.  
J Setting Values  
D
E
Guide for the current operation buttons.  
K Operation  
Guide  
A
Changing Setting Values  
C
A
B
D
E
F
F
D
E
B
Name  
Description  
Name  
Description  
Field for entering the title.  
A Character Entry  
Menu item to be changed.  
A list of setting values C appears in  
a pop-up.  
A Menu Item to  
You can enter up to 8 characters for the  
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname or up  
to 4 characters for the [Clip Name Prefix].  
Field  
Change  
Guide for the current operation  
buttons.  
B Operation Guide  
Select a character using the key cursor D,  
and press the Set button (R) to input the  
selected character at the position of the  
character cursor. The character cursor  
moves to the next position on the right  
each time a character is input.  
B Character  
Cursor  
A pop-up displaying a list of setting  
values for selection.  
The height of the pop-up depends  
on the number of settings available.  
Use the scroll bar D to confirm the  
current display status.  
C List of Setting  
Values  
The cursor can be moved using the arrow  
keys F.  
Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to  
move the key cursor D to the character  
you want to enter.  
C Character Keys  
Indicates the scroll position.  
D Scroll Bar  
Indicates the selected item. Use the  
cross-shaped button (JK) to move  
the cursor.  
E Cursor  
Indicates the currently selected character  
or item. Use the cross-shaped button  
(JKH I) to move the cursor.  
D Key Cursor  
Setting values before changing.  
R appears at the beginning of the  
item.  
F Setting Values  
Before Change  
Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set  
button (R) to confirm the title.  
E Confirmation  
Buttons  
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button  
(R) on the side control panel of the camera  
recorder to abort character input and  
return to the previous screen.  
Text Input with Software Keyboard  
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Scene File]/  
[Picture File] subname and [Clip Name Prefix].  
Moves the position of the character cursor  
B.  
F Arrow Keys  
Select [BS] and press the Set button (R)  
on the side control panel of the camera  
recorder to delete the character on the left  
of the character cursor B.  
G [BS] Backspace  
Key  
Select [SP] and press the Set button (R)  
on the side control panel of the camera  
recorder to enter a space at the current  
position of the character cursor B.  
H [SP] Space Key  
71  
 
Menu Screen Hierarchical  
Chart  
Record Format... (A Page 75)  
System Definition  
File Format  
Camera Resolution  
Frame & Bit Rate  
Aspect Ratio  
Audio Set... (A Page 77)  
Frame Rate  
Pre Rec Time  
Clip Name Prefix  
Reset Clip Number  
Input1 Mic Ref.  
Input2 Mic Ref.  
Mic Wind Cut  
Audio Ref. Level  
Audio Limiter  
Test Tone  
Bars  
Shutter  
AE LEVEL  
AE Speed  
ALC Limit  
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)  
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)  
EEI Limit  
Smooth Trans  
Switch Set... (A Page 79)  
FULL AUTO... (A Page 81)  
Camera Process... (A Page 82)  
Detail  
Master Black  
Black Toe  
Knee  
White Clip  
Gamma  
White Balance... (A Page 85)  
Color Matrix  
Color Gain  
DNR  
Reverse Picture  
Reset Process  
Memo :  
A [Back] item (omitted in the chart) can be found at the end of each menu item. Select [Back] and press the Set button (R) to  
return to the previous level.  
72  
 
TCG Source  
TC Preset  
UB Preset  
Drop  
Marker Setting... (A Page 90)  
Status Display... (A Page 90)  
LCD + VF  
VF Display  
LCD Mirror Mode  
Output Terminal  
Set Up  
HD/SD-SDI Out  
Down Convert  
Analog Out Char.  
SDI Out Char.  
Audio Monitor  
Alarm Level  
Genlock Input  
Genlock Adjust... (A Page 96)  
Return Input  
Return Aspect  
Tally System  
Front Tally  
Back Tally  
1394 Rec Trigger  
1394 Auto Power Off  
Mode LED  
Reset All  
Date/Time  
Time Zone  
System Information  
Format Media  
Restore Media  
Setup File Manage... (A Page 97)  
Load File...  
Store File...  
Reset File...  
Memo :  
A [Back] item (omitted in the chart) can be found at the end of each menu item. Select [Back] and press the Set button (R) to  
return to the previous level.  
73  
Main Menu Screen  
Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These items are displayed in  
gray, and they cannot be selected.  
Item  
Function  
Menu screen for specifying video or audio settings during shooting and playback.  
Record Set...  
The cursor does not move to this item during recording or in Media mode. (A Page 75)  
Menu screen for specifying operation settings during shooting.  
The cursor moves to this item only in Camera mode. (A Page 78)  
Camera Function...  
Camera Process...  
TC/UB...  
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera images.  
The cursor does not move to this item in the AUX and Media modes. (A Page 82)  
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.  
The cursor does not move to this item during recording. (A Page 88)  
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.  
LCD/VF...  
This menu screen can be used to specify settings related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern display, screen  
size, marker, and safety zone. In addition, it is also used for selecting whether to display characters on the LCD  
monitor or viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the picture quality of the LCD monitor screen.  
The cursor does not move to this item in Media mode. (A Page 88)  
Item for specifying connection settings with external devices. (A Page 92)  
A/V Out...  
Others...  
Menu screen for specifying the settings of other functions.  
Use this item to adjust the alarm volume, front/back tally lamp settings, status indicator, 1394 input settings, genlock  
input and return video input settings, date/time, time zone, and other settings. It can also be used to reset the menu  
settings to their default values. (A Page 93)  
Item for formatting or restoring the SDHC card. (A Page 97)  
Media...  
Displays the [Setup File Manage] menu screen.  
Setup File Manage...  
Settings of the menu screen can be saved as a file on the camera recorder or an SDHC card, and the saved  
settings can be loaded when necessary.  
The cursor does not move to this item during recording or in Media mode. (A Page 97)  
Select this item and press the Set button (R) to return to the normal screen.  
Exit  
74  
 
Record Set Menu  
Record Format Menu  
After setting of all items in the [Record Format] menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the screen to apply the new  
settings on the camera recorder and switch the record format. A APlease WaitB message appears during switching.  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
HD (MPEG2)  
SD (DV)  
For selecting a system definition.  
System Definition  
HD (MPEG2) : Records in HD (High Definition) quality.  
SD (DV)  
: Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality.  
Note :  
The selectable options for the [File Format], [Camera Resolution], and  
[Frame & Bit Rate] settings vary depending on the setting of this item.  
When the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB, this item is fixed at ASD  
(DV)B. (U model)  
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to the SDHC card.  
File Format  
When [System Definition] is  
QuickTime  
AHD (MPEG2)B  
MP4  
When [System Definition] is ASD QuickTime  
(DV)B  
AVI  
1920x1080  
1440x1080  
1280x720  
720 x 480  
720 x 576  
For setting the size of the recorded image when [System Definition] is set to  
AHD (MPEG2)B. (Horizontal x vertical)  
Camera Resolution  
Memo :  
When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B, this item is fixed as follows for  
the different models.  
U model : 720 x 480  
E model : 720 x 576  
The selectable values of [Frame & Bit Rate] vary according to the setting of  
this item.  
For setting the frame rate and encoding bit rate when [System Definition] is set  
to AHD (MPEG2)B.  
Selection can be made from 19 combinations of frame rate (60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,  
24p, 60i, 50i) and bit rate (HQ (35Mbps) VBR), (SP (25 Mbps/19 Mbps) CBR).  
Frame & Bit Rate  
When [Camera Resolution] is  
A1280x720B  
60p (HQ) (U model),  
60p (SP), 30p (HQ), 30p  
(SP),  
Memo :  
50p (HQ) (E model),  
When [System Definition] is set to ASD (DV)B, this item is fixed as follows for  
the different models.  
50p (SP), 25p (HQ), 25p  
(SP), 24p (HQ), 24p (SP)  
U model : 60i  
E model : 50i  
When [Camera Resolution] is  
A1440x1080B, and [File Format]  
is AQuickTimeB  
60i (HQ) (U model),  
60i (SP),  
The selectable items vary according to the [File Format] and  
[Camera Resolution] settings.  
50i (HQ) (E model),  
50i (SP)  
When [Camera Resolution] is  
A1440x1080B, and [File Format]  
is AMP4B  
60i (SP) (U model),  
50i (SP) (E model)  
When [Camera Resolution] is  
60i (HQ) (U model),  
A1920x1080B  
30p (HQ),  
50i (HQ) (E model),  
25p (HQ), 24p (HQ)  
16:9  
4:3  
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image when [System Definition] is  
set to ASD (DV)B.  
Aspect Ratio  
Memo :  
When [System Definition] is set to AHD (MPEG2)B, this item is fixed at  
A16:9B.  
75  
             
Rec Mode Menu  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
For selecting the record mode for recording to the SDHC card. (A Page 58)  
Rec Mode  
Normal  
Memo :  
Pre Rec  
[Variable Frame] is selectable when [Camera Resolution] is set to  
A1280x720B, and [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A30p (HQ)B, A24p (HQ)B, or  
A25p (HQ)B.  
Clip Continuous  
Variable Frame  
For setting the recording [Frame Rate] when [Rec Mode] is set to  
[Variable Frame].  
Frame Rate  
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is  
A30p (HQ)B  
60, 48, 40,  
30,  
24, 20, 15, 12, 10  
Memo :  
When [AE LEVEL] in the [Main Menu]  
B
[Camera Function]  
B
[Switch Set]  
menu is set to AAE LEVEL/VFRB, you can use the cross-shaped button (H I)  
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is  
A24p (HQ)B  
60, 48, 40, 30,  
24,  
20, 15, 12, 10  
to select the frame rate during Variable Frame Rec. In modes other than  
Variable Frame Rec, the cross-shaped button (H I) functions as the [AE  
LEVEL] setting button. (  
When [Frame Rate] is changed and the shutter speed becomes a value that is  
invalid for the current [Frame Rate], the shutter speed is automatically  
changed to match the current [Frame Rate].  
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is  
A25p (HQ)B  
50, 40,  
25,  
20, 15, 12.5, 10  
5sec,  
For setting the pre-recording time when [Rec Mode] is set to APre RecB.  
Pre Rec Time  
10sec, 20sec  
Clip Set Menu  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
xxxG  
For setting the first four characters of the name of the clip file to be recorded to  
the SDHC card.  
Enter any of the 38 characters including alphabets (upper case), numbers  
(0 to 9), “_” (underscore), and “-” (hyphen) using the software keyboard.  
Clip Name Prefix  
(The default value of xxx  
is the last three digits of  
the serial number.)  
^
For assigning a new number to (Clip Number) by resetting it (0001). Select  
[Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset the number.  
When other clips exist on the SDHC card, the smallest available number is  
used after reset.  
Reset Clip Number  
Example: If the [Clip Name Prefix] is AABCDB, and AABCD0001B already  
exists on the SDHC card, AABCD0002B will be assigned.  
76  
             
Audio Set Menu  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
-50dB  
-60dB  
For setting the reference input level when the [AUDIO INPUT1] button is set to AMICB or  
AMIC+48VB.  
-50dB : Sets -50 dB as the reference value.  
-60dB : Sets -60 dB as the reference value.  
Input1 Mic Ref.  
Input2 Mic Ref.  
Mic Wind Cut  
-50dB  
-60dB  
For setting the reference input level when the [AUDIO INPUT2] button is set to AMICB or  
AMIC+48VB.  
-50dB : Sets -50 dB as the reference value.  
-60dB : Sets -60 dB as the reference value.  
Both  
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of the audio input signals (low-cut) when  
the [AUDIO INPUT 1/2] button is set to AMICB or AMIC+48VB. Set this item to reduce wind  
noise from the microphone.  
Both : Enables low-cut on both the [INPUT1] and [INPUT2] terminals.  
Input2 : Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT2] terminal only.  
Input1 : Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT1] terminal only.  
Input2  
Input1  
Off  
Off  
: Disables low-cut.  
-12dB  
-20dB  
For setting the audio reference level to be recorded to the SDHC card. (Applies to both  
[CH1/CH2].)  
-20dB : Outputs signals of the reference level when the meter is at -20 dBFS.  
-12dB : Outputs signals of the reference level when the meter is at -12 dBFS.  
Audio Ref. Level  
Audio Limiter  
On  
For specifying whether to trigger the limiter when the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch  
is set to AMANUALB.  
Off  
On  
: Triggers the limiter when excessive audio signals are input, and compresses the  
recording level.  
Off  
: Does not trigger limiter.  
On  
For specifying whether to output the audio test signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.  
Test Tone  
On  
Off  
: Audio test signals are output.  
: Audio test signals are not output.  
Off  
77  
         
Camera Function Menu  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
On  
For setting whether to output color bars.  
Bars  
On  
Off  
: Color bars are output.  
: Color bars are not output.  
Off  
Memo :  
When the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera recorder is set to AONB, and [Bars] in the  
[FULL AUTO] menu is set to AOffB, this item is set to AOffB automatically. (A Page 81)  
EEI  
For specifying shutter-related settings.  
Shutter  
Variable  
Use this item to set to AStepB (fixed value) or AVariableB when operating with the cross-  
shaped button (JK) on the right of the camera recorder. During automatic control, this is  
set to AEEIB.  
Step  
EEI  
Variable : Sets to variable scan. Use this setting such as when shooting a PC monitor.  
Step : Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter speed by a fixed value.  
: Sets to automatic control.  
+3 to +1,  
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto Exposure).  
This can also be adjusted using the cross-shaped button (H I) on the right of the camera  
recorder.  
AE LEVEL  
AE Speed  
Normal,  
-1 to -3  
Fast  
For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto Exposure).  
Middle  
Slow  
18dB  
12dB  
6dB  
For setting the maximum gain value of AALCB, which electrically boosts the sensitivity level  
according to the brightness automatically.  
ALC Limit  
18dB  
12dB  
6dB  
: Sets the maximum ALC gain value to +18 dB.  
: Sets the maximum ALC gain value to +12 dB.  
: Sets the maximum ALC gain value to +6 dB.  
F5.6, F4, F2.8, F2,  
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when auto iris is enabled.  
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when auto iris is enabled.  
For setting the shutter speed control range when EEI is enabled.  
Auto Iris Limit  
(OPEN)  
F1.6,  
F1.4  
F16,  
Auto Iris Limit  
(CLOSE)  
F11,  
F8, F5.6,  
4F-stop  
3F-stop  
2F-stop  
EEI Limit  
4F-stop : Moves iris control by 4 f/stops in EEI.  
3F-stop : Moves iris control by 3 f/stops in EEI.  
2F-stop : Moves iris control by 2 f/stops in EEI.  
Fast  
For setting the shock reduction function, which slows down the sudden change when  
switching with the [GAIN] or [WHT.BAL.] selection switch.  
However, this function is disabled when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is  
set to AONB, or when switching the gain selection switch while AALCB is set.  
Smooth Trans  
Middle  
Slow  
Off  
Fast  
: Runs the Smooth Trans function at high speed.  
Middle : Runs the Smooth Trans function at medium speed.  
Slow  
Off  
: Runs the Smooth Trans function at low speed.  
: Deactivates the Smooth Trans function.  
For specifying the switch settings of the camera recorder. (A Page 79)  
Switch Set...  
FULL AUTO...  
For specifying settings when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB. (A Page 81)  
78  
         
Switch Set Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
None  
For assigning the FAW (Fulltime Auto White Balance) function to a position on the [WHT.BAL.]  
selection switch.  
This is fixed at AFAWB when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB.  
FAW  
PRESET  
A
B
None  
: FAW function is not assigned.  
: Assigns FAW to the PRESET position.  
: Assigns FAW to the A position.  
: Assigns FAW to the B position.  
PRESET  
A
B
ALC, 18dB, 15dB,  
12dB, 9dB, 6dB, 3dB,  
0dB  
For setting the gain value of each position on the [GAIN] selection switch.  
This is fixed at AALCB when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB.  
GAIN L  
GAIN M  
GAIN H  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
(Default values GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 9dB, GAIN H: 18dB)  
By assigning one of the following functions to each of the [USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] buttons, these buttons can be  
used to control the assigned function (on/off, start, switch).  
Set according to the shooting conditions. Functions can be assigned only in Camera mode (except AUX mode).  
(Default values USER1: Bars, USER2: B.Stretch3, USER3: Load File)  
Setting Values  
None  
Description  
No function is assigned.  
Bars  
Assigns the function of [Bars] in the [Camera Function] menu. (A Page 78)  
Assigns the function of [Load File] in the [Setup File Manage] menu. (A Page 97)  
Assigns the Clip Review function. (A Page 56)  
Load File  
Clip Review  
B.Stretch1  
Assigns the functions of [Stretch Level] and [Compress Level] under [Black Toe] in the  
[Camera Process] menu. (A Page 82)  
B.Stretch2  
B.Stretch3  
B.Stretch4  
B.Stretch5  
B.Compress1  
B.Compress2  
B.Compress3  
B.Compress4  
B.Compress5  
Clip Review  
OK Mark  
For assigning a function to the [RET] button on the lens. This function does not work if the [RET]  
button is not available on the lens in use.  
Clip Review : Assigns the Clip Review function to the [RET] button. (A Page 56)  
LENS RET  
Focus Assist  
Return  
OK Mark  
: Assigns the OK mark function to the [RET] button. This function operates during  
Focus Assist : Assigns the Focus Assist function to the [RET] button. (A Page 37)  
Return  
: Assigns the return video display function to the [RET] button. (A Page 128)  
Last 5 sec  
Top 5 sec  
CLIP  
For specifying the operation when [LENS RET] is set to AClip ReviewB.  
Clip Review  
Last 5 sec  
Top 5 sec  
CLIP  
: Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the ending.  
: Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the beginning.  
: Views the entire clip.  
Memo :  
Selectable when [LENS RET] is set to AClip ReviewB, or when any of the [USER1]/[USER2]/  
[USER3] buttons is set to AClip ReviewB.  
79  
           
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Skin Area  
Function  
For assigning the function of the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch on the camera recorder.  
SKIN A./SPOT M.  
Skin Area  
Spot Meter  
: Assigns the Skin Detail function and its area display.  
: Assigns the Spot Meter display function.  
Spot Meter  
Memo :  
When ASkin AreaB is selected, [Skin Detect] is forcibly set to AOnB when the [SKIN AREA/  
SPOT METER] switch is flipped, even if [Skin Detect] is set to AOffB. Alternatively, you can set  
[Skin Detect] to AOffB, and turn the Skin Detail function On/Off by flipping the lever whenever  
Max&Min  
Min  
Max  
For specifying the operation of [Spot Meter]. (A Page 55)  
SPOT METER  
Max&Min  
Min  
: Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the image.  
: Displays the darkest area of the image.  
: Displays the brightest area of the image.  
Max  
Manual  
Manual  
: Displays the image brightness at a specified position.  
Memo :  
This item is selectable when [SKIN A./SPOT M.] is set to ASpot MeterB. When ASkin AreaB is  
set, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
Positions are detected automatically when this item is set to AMax&MinB, AMinB, or AMaxB.  
When set to AManualB, it functions in a fixed position.  
AE LEVEL/VFR  
AE LEVEL  
Disable  
For specifying the operation of the cross-shaped button (H I) on the right of the camera  
recorder.  
AE LEVEL/VFR: Sets the number of frames during Variable Frame Rec, and operates as the  
AE LEVEL  
AE LEVEL setting button in other cases. (A Page 60)  
: Operates as the AE LEVEL setting button at all times.  
: Disables the button.  
AE LEVEL  
Disable  
80  
       
FULL AUTO Item  
This is used to set specific functions to the auto mode when the [FULL AUTO] switch of the camera recorder is set to AONB.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
SW Set  
SW Set  
ALC  
: Sets gain according to the [GAIN] selection switch.  
Gain  
: Sets gain to the AALCB (forced auto) mode.  
ALC  
Memo :  
When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AALCB and cannot  
be selected. (A Page 131)  
Off  
Off  
: Iris control is not performed.  
Iris Control  
Auto  
: Sets iris control to the forced auto mode.  
Auto  
Memo :  
When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AAutoB and cannot  
be selected. (A Page 131)  
When the iris mode switch of the lens is set to AAB (auto), the iris is fixed at the point of time  
when this item is switched from AAutoB to AOffB.  
SW Set  
SW Set  
EEI  
: Sets shutter according to the switch.  
: Sets shutter to the forced auto mode.  
Shutter  
White Balance  
Bars  
EEI  
Memo :  
When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AEEIB and cannot  
be selected. (A Page 131)  
SW Set  
SW Set  
FAW  
: Sets white balance according to the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch.  
: Sets white balance to the forced auto mode.  
FAW  
Memo :  
When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AFAWB and cannot  
be selected. (A Page 131)  
Menu Set  
Menu Set : Sets color bar output according to the menu settings (via switch operation).  
Off  
: Sets color bar output to the forced Off mode.  
Off  
Memo :  
When the remote control unit comes with an FAS function, this is fixed at AOffB and cannot be  
SW Set  
SW Set  
Auto  
: Sets the audio recording level according to the switch.  
: Sets the audio recording level to the forced auto mode.  
Audio  
Auto  
81  
             
Camera Process Menu  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Max, 9 to 1,  
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement level.  
Increase the number : Sharpens the contour.  
Decrease the number : Softens the contour.  
Detail  
Normal,  
-1 to -9, Min, Off  
Off  
: Disables this function.  
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour (detail). (A Page 84)  
Adjust...  
Memo :  
This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set to AOffB.  
Max, 9 to 1,  
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that serves as the reference black.  
Master Black  
Black Toe  
Increase the number : Raises the pedestal level.  
Decrease the number : Lowers the pedestal level.  
Normal,  
-1 to -9, Min  
Compress  
Stretch  
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item according to the condition of the captured  
video signals.  
Compress : Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase the contrast when the entire image  
appears bright and contrast is weak. Specify the compression amount with  
[Compress Level].  
Normal  
Stretch  
: Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to stretch the signals of these areas  
only, thereby showing the contrast between bright and dark areas more clearly.  
Specify the stretch amount with Stretch Level.  
Normal  
: Normal condition.  
Level 5  
Level 4  
Level 3  
Level 2  
Level 1  
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is specified.  
Stretch Level  
Memo :  
This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is set to AStretchB. Otherwise, this item appears  
as A---B and cannot be selected.  
Compression amount increases when a larger value is specified.  
Compress  
Level  
Memo :  
This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is set to ACompressB. Otherwise, this item  
appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
15% to 11%  
10%,  
For specifying the luminance point at which the dark area is to be stretched or compressed.  
Point Level  
Knee  
Memo :  
When [Black Toe] is set to ANormalB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
9% to 5%  
Manual  
For specifying the AKneeB operation, which compresses video signals beyond a certain level to  
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To check the gradation of a bright area, set to  
AManualB and adjust the knee point manually.  
Auto  
Manual : Enables manual adjustment of the knee point (starting point of knee operation) using  
ALevelB.  
Auto  
: Adjusts the knee point (starting point of knee operation) automatically according to the  
luminance level.  
100%  
For setting the starting point of knee compression (knee point).  
Level  
95%, 90%, 85%,  
80%, 75%, 70%  
Increase the number : Increases the knee point level.  
Decrease the number : Decreases the knee point level.  
Memo :  
When [Knee] is set to AAutoB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
Fast  
Middle  
Slow  
For setting the response speed of the AKneeB operation when [Knee] is set to AAutoB.  
Set to ASlowB when shooting an object under a condition where there is drastic change in the  
light intensity.  
Sensitivity  
Memo :  
When [Knee] is set to AManualB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
82  
   
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item Setting Values  
White Clip  
Function  
100%  
For setting the point to apply white clip for input video signals with a high luminance level.  
108%  
100%  
: Applies white clip at the point where the luminance level is 100 %. Even when this  
item is set to A108%B, it switches automatically to A100%B if the screen appears too  
white. Set to this value when the system in use limits Y output signals within 100 %.  
: Applies white clip at the point where the luminance level is 108 %.  
108%  
Film Out  
Cinema  
Standard  
Off  
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the gradation expression.  
Gamma  
Film Out : Sets to a gamma curve that focuses on the gradation expression of dark areas in  
order to ease post-processing of movie film output.  
Cinema : Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to the screen characteristics of movies.  
Standard : Sets to a standard gamma curve.  
Off  
: Disables gamma curve adjustment.  
Max, 4 to1,  
Normal,  
This item can be specified separately when [Gamma] is set to AStandardB, ACinemaB, or AFilm  
OutB.  
Master Level  
Increase the number : Enhances the gradation of black. However, the gradation of bright areas  
-1 to -4, Min  
deteriorates.  
Decrease the number : Enhances the gradation of bright areas. However, the gradation of black  
deteriorates.  
Memo :  
When [Gamma] is set to AOffB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
Max, 4 to1,  
Normal,  
-1 to -4, Min  
Gamma curves can be adjusted for each of R, G, and B.  
Use this to adjust to a color tone that cannot be expressed by the [Color Matrix] setting.  
R Level  
G Level  
B Level  
Memo :  
When [Gamma] is set to AOffB, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected.  
Menu for adjusting white balance. (A Page 85)  
White Balance...  
Color Matrix  
Cinema Subdued  
Cinema Vivid  
Standard  
For setting the color matrix.  
Cinema Subdued  
: Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to the screen  
characteristics of movies.  
Cinema Vivid  
: Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the screen characteristics of  
movies.  
Off  
Standard  
Off  
: Sets to a standard color matrix.  
: Sets the color matrix function to Off.  
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color according to the user’s preference.  
Adjust...  
This item cannot be selected when [Color Matrix] is set to AOffB. (A Page 86)  
Off, Min, -1 to -9,  
Normal  
9 to 1, Max  
For adjusting the video signal color level.  
Color Gain  
Off  
: Sets the video to black-and-white.  
Increase the number : Makes the colors more dense.  
Decrease the number : Makes the colors less dense.  
Memo :  
Images are displayed in black-and-white when this is set to AOffB.  
On  
Off  
For setting the DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) function. The S/N ratio of the video can be  
enhanced by setting [DNR] to AOnB.  
DNR  
On  
Off  
: Enables noise reduction.  
: Disables noise reduction.  
Memo :  
A retained image may appear when this is set to AOnB.  
Rotate  
Off  
For recording images correctly by reversing the image horizontally or vertically (Rotate) when  
the lens image appears upside down or laterally inverted.  
Reverse Picture  
Reset Process  
Rotate : Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the image.  
Off  
: Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the image.  
^
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu to their default settings.  
83  
     
Detail/Adjust... Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
H-Max, 4 to1,  
Normal,  
Function  
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour (detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V)  
direction.  
Increase the number : Enhances contour in the horizontal direction.  
Decrease the number : Enhances contour in the vertical direction.  
V/H Balance  
-1 to -4, H-Min  
High  
For specifying the correction frequency of the horizontal contour. Set this according to the object.  
H Frequency  
V Frequency  
High  
: Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this when shooting objects with fine  
Middle  
Low  
patterns.  
Middle : Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.  
Low  
: Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this when shooting objects with large  
patterns.  
High  
For specifying the correction frequency of the vertical contour. Set this according to the object.  
Low  
High  
: Emphasizes the low frequency range.  
: Emphasizes the high frequency range.  
Low  
Memo :  
This item can only be selected when [Camera Resolution] of [Record Format] in the  
[Record Set] menu is set to A1280x720B. (A Page 75)  
On  
For turning On/Off the Skin Detail function, which is used to adjust the contour correction effect  
of the colors captured by the [Skin Color Adjust] menu.  
Skin Detect  
Off  
On  
: Enables the Skin Detail function. (Softens the detail at areas where skin tone is  
detected.)  
Off  
: Disables the Skin Detail function.  
Memo :  
Even if [Skin Detect] is set to AOffB, [Skin Detect] is forcibly set to AOnB when the  
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch is flipped. Alternatively, you can set [Skin Detect] to AOffB,  
and turn the Skin Detail function On/Off by flipping the lever whenever necessary.  
-3  
-2  
-1  
For setting the level of contour correction (degree of softening) using the Skin Detail function.  
Level  
-3  
-2  
-1  
: High level of contour correction (degree of softening)  
: Medium level of contour correction (degree of softening)  
: Low level of contour correction (degree of softening)  
For setting the Skin Detail function. (A Page 114)  
Skin Color  
Adjust...  
Execute  
For capturing the skin color.  
Skin Color  
Detect  
Execute : Captures the color that triggers the Skin Detail function.  
Stop  
Stop  
: Disables capturing of the color that triggers the Skin Detail function.  
Wide, 9 to 1,  
For adjusting the range of skin tone to trigger the Skin Detail function. Adjust accordingly while  
checking the color range visually.  
Increase the number : Widens the range.  
Decrease the number : Narrows the range.  
Skin Color  
Range  
Normal,  
-1 to -9, Narrow  
Memo :  
When [Color Gain] in the [Camera Process] menu is set to AOffB, only the area where Skin  
Detail is functioning is displayed in skin tone. (A Page 83)  
84  
       
White Balance Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
2800K, 3200K,  
3400K, 4200K,  
4800K, 5200K,  
5600K, 6500K,  
7500K  
For setting the color temperature when the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch of the camera recorder  
is set to APRESETB.  
Preset Temp.  
2800K, 3200K,  
3400K, 4200K,  
4800K, 5200K,  
5600K, 6500K,  
7500K  
For setting the alternative color temperature in the Preset mode.  
When the [WHT.BAL.] switch of the camera recorder is set to APRESETB, pressing the [AWB]  
button each time switches the color temperature setting in the Preset mode.  
([Preset Temp.] 1 [Alternative Temp.])  
Alternative Temp.  
White Paint R  
Max, 30 to 1,  
For adjusting the R (red) component in the AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
Increase the number : Strengthens the red.  
Decrease the number : Weakens the red.  
Normal,  
-1 to -31, Min  
Memo :  
This item is selectable when the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch on the right of the camera  
recorder is set to AAB or ABB. When APRESETB is set, this item appears as A---B and cannot  
be selected.  
Different values can be specified for AAB and ABB.  
After the [AWB] (Auto White Balance) button is pressed to readjust the white balance while  
[Clear Paint After AWB] set to AOnB, [White Paint R] switches automatically to ANormalB.  
Max, 30 to 1,  
Normal,  
For adjusting the B (blue) component in the AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.  
Increase the number : Strengthens the blue.  
Decrease the number : Weakens the blue.  
White Paint B  
-1 to -31, Min  
Memo :  
This item is selectable when the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch on the right of the camera  
recorder is set to AAB or ABB. When APRESETB is set, this item appears as A---B and cannot  
be selected.  
Different values can be specified for AAB and ABB.  
After the [AWB] (Auto White Balance) button is pressed to readjust the white balance while  
[Clear Paint After AWB] set to AOnB, [White Paint B] switches automatically to ANormalB.  
On  
For specifying whether to clear the [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] settings after executing AWB  
(Auto White Balance).  
Clear Paint After  
AWB  
Off  
On  
Off  
: [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] are set to ANormalB after executing AWB.  
: [White Paint R]/[White Paint B] are not changed after executing AWB.  
Manual  
For specifying white shading adjustment settings. (A Page 44)  
Preset : Sets white shading adjustment to a fixed level. Manual adjustment is disabled.  
Manual : Enables manual white shading adjustment.  
Shading Mode  
Adjust...  
Preset  
For making white shading adjustments.  
Memo :  
This item cannot be selected when [Shading Mode] is set to APresetB.  
85  
         
Shading Mode/Adjust Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
This item is selectable only when [Shading Mode] is set to  
this is set to Preset  
The screen switches to a color display, and the displays for Bars, Zebra and the Focus Assist mode are temporarily set to  
AManualB. [R Level], [G Level], and [B Level] cannot be selected when  
A
B.  
AOFFB,  
while the  
AB & W  
B
mode in the [VF Display] menu temporarily switches to AColorB.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Max, 126 to 1,  
For adjusting the red level of white shading when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB.  
R Level  
G Level  
B Level  
Increase the number : Decreases the red level at the bottom of the screen, and increases the  
red level at the top of the screen.  
Decrease the number : Decreases the red level at the top of the screen, and increases the red  
level at the bottom of the screen.  
Normal,  
-1 to -127, Min  
Max, 126 to 1,  
For adjusting the green level of white shading when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB.  
Increase the number : Decreases the green level at the bottom of the screen, and increases  
the green level at the top of the screen.  
Decrease the number : Decreases the green level at the top of the screen, and increases the  
green level at the bottom of the screen.  
Normal,  
-1 to -127, Min  
Max, 126 to 1,  
For adjusting the blue level of white shading when [Shading Mode] is set to AManualB.  
Increase the number : Decreases the blue level at the bottom of the screen, and increases the  
blue level at the top of the screen.  
Decrease the number : Decreases the blue level at the top of the screen, and increases the  
blue level at the bottom of the screen.  
Normal,  
-1 to -127, Min  
Color Matrix/Adjust Item  
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color according to the user’s preference.  
The adjusted values of AStandardB, ACinema VividB, and ACinema SubduedB in [Color Matrix] can be stored individually.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Max, 19 to 1,  
For adjusting the magenta/red level of the video toward magenta.  
Mg&R Mg Level  
Increase the number : Enhances the magenta component of magenta/red.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the magenta component of magenta/red.  
Normal,  
-1 to -19, Min  
For adjusting the magenta/red level of the video toward red.  
Increase the number : Enhances the red component of magenta/red.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the red component of magenta/red.  
Mg&R R Level  
R&Yl R Level  
R&Yl Yl Level  
Yl&G Yl Level  
Yl&G G Level  
Yl&G Mask Range  
For adjusting the red/yellow level of the video toward red.  
Increase the number : Enhances the red component of red/yellow.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the red component of red/yellow.  
For adjusting the red/yellow level of the video toward yellow.  
Increase the number : Enhances the yellow component of red/yellow.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the yellow component of red/yellow.  
For adjusting the yellow/green level of the video toward yellow.  
Increase the number : Enhances the green component of yellow/green.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the yellow component of yellow/green.  
For adjusting the yellow/green level of the video toward green.  
Increase the number : Enhances the green component of yellow/green.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the green component of yellow/green.  
Max, 19 to 11,  
10,  
For adjusting the extent of effect on the skin tone (color near the I-axis) when [Yl&G Yl Level]  
and [Yl&G G Level] are adjusted.  
Increase the number : Reduces the effect on the skin tone.  
Decrease the number : Increases the effect on the skin tone.  
9 to 1, Min  
Memo :  
When green is enhanced in the + direction with [Yl&G G Level], increasing the  
[Yl&G Mask Range] value helps to prevent the skin tone from becoming greenish.  
When [Yl&G Yl Level] and [Yl&G G Level] are set to ANormalB, no changes will be observed  
on the screen when the [Yl&G Mask Range] value is changed.  
86  
     
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Max, 19 to 1,  
Normal,  
-1 to -19, Min  
For adjusting the green/cyan level of the video toward green.  
G&Cy G Level  
Increase the number : Enhances the green component of green/cyan.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the green component of green/cyan.  
For adjusting the green/cyan level of the video toward cyan.  
Increase the number : Enhances the cyan component of green/cyan.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the cyan component of green/cyan.  
G&Cy Cy Level  
Cy&B Cy Level  
Cy&B B Level  
B&Mg B Level  
B&Mg Mg Level  
R Rotation  
For adjusting the cyan/blue level of the video toward cyan.  
Increase the number : Enhances the cyan component of cyan/blue.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the cyan component of cyan/blue.  
For adjusting the cyan/blue level of the video toward blue.  
Increase the number : Enhances the blue component of cyan/blue.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the blue component of cyan/blue.  
For adjusting the blue/magenta level of the video toward blue.  
Increase the number : Enhances the blue component of blue/magenta.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the blue component of blue/magenta.  
For adjusting the blue/magenta level of the video toward magenta.  
Increase the number : Enhances the magenta component of blue/magenta.  
Decrease the number : Reduces the magenta component of blue/magenta.  
Max, 4 to1,  
Normal,  
-1 to -4, Min  
For adjusting the hue of the R-axis (red and cyan).  
Increase the number : Rotates hue of red toward yellow, and cyan toward blue.  
Decrease the number : Rotates hue of red toward magenta, and cyan toward green.  
For adjusting the hue of the G-axis (green and magenta).  
Increase the number : Rotates hue of green toward blue, and magenta toward red.  
Decrease the number : Rotates hue of green toward yellow, and magenta toward blue.  
G Rotation  
For adjusting the hue of the B-axis (blue and yellow).  
Increase the number : Rotates hue of blue toward magenta, and yellow toward green.  
Decrease the number : Rotates hue of blue toward cyan, and yellow toward red.  
B Rotation  
87  
TC/UB Menu  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Internal  
For selecting the source of the time code generator.  
TCG Source  
Internal  
External  
: Selects the built-in time code generator of the camera recorder.  
: Selects the time code generator connected to the [TC IN] terminal.  
External  
Memo :  
If this item is set to AExternalB, [TC Preset], [UB Preset], and [Drop Frame] cannot be set.  
^
^
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second, frame).  
TC Preset  
Display  
: Drop setting  
02:02:25.20  
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20  
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)  
Display : AB CD EF 01  
UB Preset  
Non Drop  
For setting the framing mode of the time code generator.  
Drop Frame  
Non Drop : Internal time code generator works in the non-drop-frame mode. Use this setting  
when placing emphasis on the number of frames.  
Drop  
Drop  
: Internal time code generator works in the drop-frame mode. Use this setting when  
placing emphasis on the recording time.  
Memo :  
This item can be set only when the frame rate of [Frame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Set] B  
[Record Format] menu is set to A60pB, A30pB, or A60iB. When the frame rate is A24pB, ANon  
DropB becomes fixed and cannot be selected. When the frame rate is A50pB, A25pB, or A50iB,  
this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)  
LCD/VF Menu  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function. (A Page 89)  
For setting items such as the safety zone and center mark. (A Page 90)  
For setting displays related to the status screen. (A Page 90)  
Shooting Assist  
Marker Setting...  
Status Display...  
LCD + VF  
On  
For selecting a method to switch between the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen displays.  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Displays images on the viewfinder at all times.  
: Turns off the viewfinder screen display when the LCD monitor is turned on.  
B & W  
For selecting whether to display the image on the viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.  
VF Display  
B & W  
Color  
: Displays the viewfinder image in black-and-white.  
: Displays the viewfinder image in color.  
Color  
Memo :  
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera mode. However, it becomes invalid in the AUX  
mode (U model) and during display of return video, and the camera recorder operates in the  
AColorB setting.  
When this item is set to AB & WB, only the captured images are displayed in black-and-white.  
The status and menu screens are displayed in color.  
Mirror  
For specifying the image display method when facing the LCD monitor. (A Page 28)  
LCD Mirror Mode  
Mirror  
Normal  
: Displays image after laterally inverting it. (Mirror display)  
: Displays image without laterally inverting it.  
Normal  
Memo :  
The setting of this item is valid only in Camera mode. However, it becomes invalid in the AUX  
mode (U model) and during display of return video, and the camera recorder operates in the  
ANormalB setting.  
During color bar and enlarged status displays, the AMirrorB setting is disabled.  
88  
             
Shooting Assist Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
ACCU-Focus  
Normal  
Function  
For specifying the operation when the [FOCUS ASSIST] button on the camera recorder is  
Focus Assist  
ACCU-Focus : Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus (forced focus) functions. The  
depth of field of the object becomes shallower to enable easier focusing. The  
ACCU-Focus function switches automatically to AOffB after about 10 seconds.  
Normal  
: Enables only the Focus Assist function. The focused area is displayed in color  
to enable easier focusing. Display color can be specified with [Color].  
Color  
Level  
Blue  
For setting the display color of the focused area when Focus Assist is activated.  
Blue  
Green  
Red  
: Displays the focused area in blue.  
: Displays the focused area in green.  
: Displays the focused area in red.  
Green  
Red  
High  
For setting the display range of the focused area when Focus Assist is activated.  
High  
Middle  
Low  
: Sets the display range wider than Middle.  
: Sets the display range to standard.  
: Sets the display range narrower than Middle.  
Middle  
Low  
2Patterns  
1Pattern  
For selecting the number of zebra patterns to be displayed.  
Zebra  
Top1  
2Patterns  
1Pattern  
: Displays 2 types of zebra patterns (Zebra1 and Zebra2).  
: Displays 1 type of zebra pattern (Zebra1).  
Over,  
For setting the maximum luminance level for the AZebra1B display.  
100% to 85%,  
80%,  
Memo :  
The Bottom1 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Top1 value to ensure that a  
75% to 5%  
(In 5 % increments)  
Top1 > Bottom1 relationship is always maintained.  
100% to 75%,  
70%,  
65% to 0%  
For setting the minimum luminance level for the AZebra1B display.  
Bottom1  
Top2  
Memo :  
The Top1 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Bottom1 value to ensure that a  
(In 5 % increments)  
Top1 > Bottom1 relationship is always maintained.  
Over,  
For setting the maximum luminance level for the AZebra2B display.  
100% to 5%  
(In 5 % increments)  
Memo :  
This item cannot be selected when [Zebra] is set to A1PatternB.  
The Bottom2 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Top2 value to ensure that a  
Top2 > Bottom2 relationship is always maintained.  
100% to 85%,  
80%,  
75% to 0%  
For setting the minimum luminance level for the AZebra2B display.  
Bottom2  
Memo :  
This item cannot be selected when [Zebra] is set to A1PatternB.  
(In 5 % increments)  
The Top2 value is automatically adjusted during setting of the Bottom2 value to ensure that a  
Top2 > Bottom2 relationship is always maintained.  
High  
For setting the frequency range for applying contour enhancement using the [VF PEAKING]  
adjustment knob or [LCD PEAKING +/-] button.  
Peaking  
Frequency  
Middle  
Low  
High  
Middle  
Low  
: Emphasizes the high frequency range.  
: Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.  
: Emphasizes the low frequency range.  
89  
       
Marker Setting Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
4:3, 14:9,  
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used from the overall angle of view.  
Aspect Ratio *1  
16:9,  
Memo :  
When [Aspect Ratio] in the [Record Format] menu is set to A4:3B, this item is fixed at A4:3B  
16:9 (+4:3),  
2.35:1 Center,  
2.35:1C.HeadRM,  
1.85:1 Center,  
1.85:1C.HeadRM,  
1.66:1, 1.75:1  
Line+Halftone  
Halftone  
Line  
For specifying how boundary markers are to be used to indicate the parts of an image that are  
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect Ratio].  
Line+Halftone : Displays the boundary using lines, and areas outside the boundary in  
halftone.  
Aspect Marker *1  
Off  
Halftone  
Line  
Off  
: Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.  
: Displays the boundary using lines.  
: Hides the boundary markers.  
95%, 93%, 90%,  
88%, 80%,  
For setting the percentage of area that is to be deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the  
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect Ratio].  
Safety Zone *1  
Center Mark *1  
Off  
On  
Off  
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate the screen center within the aspect ratio  
selected in [Aspect Ratio].  
On  
Off  
: Displays the center mark.  
: Hides the center mark.  
*1: Regardless of the setting, the marker does not appear during Clip Review, return video display, and in the AUX mode (U model) and Media  
mode.  
Status Display Item  
This menu is used to set the status displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
F.No+Iris Ind.  
F. No  
For specifying whether to display the iris position/iris level mark in the status display on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screens.  
F.No/Iris Indicator  
F.No+Iris Ind. : Displays the iris position/level.  
Off  
F.No  
Off  
: Displays the iris position.  
: Hides the iris position/iris level mark.  
On  
For specifying whether to display the filter position in the status display on the LCD monitor and  
viewfinder screens.  
Filter  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Displays the filter position.  
: Hides the filter position.  
On  
For specifying whether to display the recording/playback video format in the status display on  
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.  
Video Format  
Media Remain  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Displays the video format mode.  
: Hides the video format mode.  
On  
For specifying whether to display the remaining space of the recording SDHC card in the status  
display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Displays the remaining space on the SDHC card.  
: Hides the remaining space on the SDHC card. However, when the remaining space  
warning is displayed, the information appears regardless of the setting.  
90  
         
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item Setting Values  
Function  
On  
For specifying whether to display the time code/user’s bit rate in the status display on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screens.  
TC/UB  
Off  
On  
: Displays the time code or user’s bit rate. Whether time code or user’s bit rate is  
displayed is determined by the setting of the [TC DISPLAY] switch on the inner  
panel of the camera recorder’s LCD monitor.  
Off  
: Hides the time code or user’s bit rate.  
On  
For specifying whether to display the audio level meter in the status display on the LCD monitor  
and viewfinder screens.  
Audio Meter  
Battery Info  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Displays the audio level meter.  
: Hides the audio level meter.  
Time  
For setting the battery information to be displayed on the status screen when an AntonBauer or  
IDX battery that supports communication is loaded.  
The status screen is displayed on the LCD monitor and/or viewfinder.  
Capacity%  
Voltage  
The battery information appears only on the STATUS 1 screen in Camera mode. (A Page 104)  
Time  
: Displays the remaining battery power in minutes. AminB  
Capacity% : Displays the remaining battery power in percentage. A%B  
Voltage  
: Displays the current battery voltage in units of 0.1 V. AVB  
Memo :  
When a battery other than the one recommended (communication supported) is used,  
AVoltageB may sometimes be displayed even when ATimeB or ACapacity%B is selected.  
When ATimeB or ACapacity%B is selected, the battery mark that appears before the value  
changes according to the remaining battery power.  
: 12 % and below,  
: 13 % - 29 %,  
: 30 % - 59 %,  
: 60 % - 100 %  
2
RES  
Display changes to A  
B once the battery power falls below 12 %.  
RES  
When calibration of the battery is required, A  
B appears for 2 seconds after every 30  
CAL  
seconds of the voltage display.  
CALIBRATION is a state that requires renewal of the battery power information. The battery is  
able to function as usual without calibration. However, calibration is recommended as correct  
information of the remaining power and time cannot be obtained otherwise. For more details,  
refer to the instruction manual of the battery.  
The remaining battery power and remaining time are intended as reference values for the  
shooting duration.  
When an IDX battery is loaded while the camera recorder is connected to a KA-MR100G  
(Memory Recorder), the ATimeB display setting may be disabled even when a recommended  
battery (communication supported) is used.  
DMY (E model)  
MDY (U model)  
YMD  
For setting the date display sequence in the status display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screens.  
Date Style  
DMY  
MDY  
YMD  
: Day/Month/Year  
: Month/Day/Year  
: Year/Month/Day  
24hour (E model)  
12hour (U model)  
For setting the time display in the status display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.  
Time Style  
24hour  
12hour  
: 24-hour display.  
: 12-hour display. (AM/PM)  
DEG  
For setting the shutter display in the status display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens.  
Shutter Disp.  
DEG  
SEC  
: Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the same way as film cameras.  
: Displays the shutter speed in seconds.  
SEC  
Memo :  
ADEGB is selectable only when [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A24p (SP)B, A24p (HQ)B, A25p  
(SP)B, or A25p (HQ)B. When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to other values, the shutter display  
setting is fixed at ASECB and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)  
When a Remote Control Unit is connected, the shutter display setting is fixed at ASECB  
regardless of the [Frame & Bit Rate] setting.  
91  
           
A/V Out Menu  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Composite  
Component  
Off  
Function  
For setting output signals from the [Y/VIDEO]/[PB]/[PR] video signal output terminal (BNC) on  
the side of the camera recorder.  
Composite : Outputs composite signals to the [Y/VIDEO] video signal output terminal.  
Component: Outputs component signals.  
Output Terminal  
Off  
: Signals are not output.  
7.5% (U model)  
0.0% (E model)  
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the video signal output from the [Y/VIDEO]/[PB]/  
[PR] video signal output terminal (BNC) on the side of the camera recorder.  
A setup signal can also be selected during signal input from the [IEEE1394] terminal.  
Set Up  
7.5%  
0.0%  
: Adds setup signal.  
: Setup signal is not added.  
Memo :  
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to A50p (SP)B, A50p (HQ)B, A50i (SP)B, A50i (HQ)B, A25p  
(SP)B, or A25p (HQ)B, this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)  
Depending on the menu settings of the camera recorder and the condition of the cable  
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be fixed at A0.0%B. A0.0%B is displayed in gray in  
this case.  
HD-SDI  
SD-SDI  
Off  
For specifying whether to output SDI signals from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal on the side of  
the camera recorder.  
HD/SD-SDI Out  
HD-SDI  
: Outputs HD-SDI signals. Embedded (superimposed) audio signals and the time  
code are also output.  
: Outputs SD-SDI signals down converted from HD. When [System Definition] in the  
[Record Format] menu is set to AHD (MPEG2)B (A Page 75), SD-SDI signals  
down converted from HD are output. Embedded (superimposed) audio signals and  
the time code are also output.  
SD-SDI  
Off  
: SDI signals are not output.  
Memo :  
When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is set to ASD (DV)B, AHD-SDIB cannot  
be selected. Only SD-SDI signals are output. (A Page 75)  
When DV signals are input from the [IEEE1394] terminal, AHD-SDIB cannot be selected.  
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal is used as a flag to determine valid  
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will not be output.  
Side Cut  
For setting the style of displaying down-converted images on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen. This  
setting applies to all Composite/SD-SDI/DV outputs.  
Side Cut : Displays image with the left and right sides cut off.  
Letter Box : Displays as a wide image with the top and bottom blackened.  
Squeeze : Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.  
Down Convert  
Letter Box  
Squeeze  
Memo :  
When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is set to ASD (DV)B, this item appears  
as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)  
On  
For selecting whether to display status and menu characters on the screen output from the  
[Y/VIDEO]/[PB]/[PR] video signal output terminal (BNC) on the side of the camera recorder.  
Analog Out Char.  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Turns on display.  
: Turns off display.  
Memo :  
When [Analog Out Char.] is set to AOnB, the details shown on the viewfinder are also  
displayed in the image output from the video signal output terminal (BNC).  
On  
For selecting whether to display status and menu characters on the screen output from the  
[HD/SD-SDI] output terminal on the side of the camera recorder.  
SDI Out Char.  
Off  
On  
Off  
: Turns on display.  
: Turns off display.  
92  
             
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Stereo  
Mix  
For setting the audio sound of the [PHONES] terminal to stereo or mixed sound when the  
[MONITOR SELECT] switch on the side of the camera recorder is set to ABothB.  
Audio Monitor  
Mix  
: Outputs mixed sound (outputs mixed sound of CH-1 and CH-2 to both L and R).  
Stereo : Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of CH-1 to L, and CH-2 to R). When a  
monitor speaker is used, only the audio sound of CH-1 is output.  
[PHONES] terminal, speaker, and RCA outputs according to the combination of the camera  
recorder’s [MONITOR SELECT] switch settings and [Audio Monitor] settings  
Output from [PHONES]  
RCA Output  
[MONITOR SELECT] [Audio Monitor]  
Speaker  
Output  
Terminal  
Setting  
Setting  
L
R
CH1  
CH2  
[CH-1]  
^
[Mix]  
[Stereo]  
^
CH1  
CH1  
CH1+CH2  
CH1  
[BOTH]  
CH1+CH2  
CH1 CH2  
CH1  
CH2  
[CH-2]  
CH2  
CH2  
Others Menu  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
High  
Middle  
Low  
For selecting whether to turn on the alarm tone as well as setting the volume.  
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker or [PHONES] terminal.  
Alarm Level  
High  
Middle  
Low  
: Outputs alarm tone at a high volume level.  
: Outputs alarm tone at a medium volume level.  
: Outputs alarm tone at a low volume level.  
: Alarm tone is not output.  
Off  
Off  
BNC  
For selecting a destination to input video synchronizing signal.  
Genlock Input  
BNC  
Adapter  
: [GENLOCK/AUX IN] terminal at the side of the camera recorder.  
: Adapter connected to the accessory connection terminal (68 pin) at the back of  
the camera recorder.  
Adapter  
Note :  
This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.  
(U model)  
^
For adjusting the H phase of the video signal of this camera recorder with respect to the  
Genlock Adjust...  
Return Input  
Note :  
This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.  
(U model)  
Adapter  
For selecting a destination to input the return video.  
Adapter  
: Adapter connected to the accessory connection terminal (68 pin) at the back of  
the camera recorder.  
Studio  
Studio  
: Adapter connected to the [STUDIO] terminal at the side of the camera recorder.  
Note :  
This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.  
(U model)  
16:9  
For selecting the aspect ratio of the return video.  
Return Aspect  
16:9  
4:3  
: Select this setting when the return video is a squeeze signal.  
: Select this setting when the return video is a 4:3 aspect signal  
(including Letter Box).  
4:3  
Note :  
This item cannot be selected when the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch is set to AAUXB.  
(U model)  
93  
           
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Studio  
For setting the display conditions of the camera recorder’s tally lamps (front/back).  
Tally System  
Studio : Displays according to the TALLY IN/PREVIEW IN signals from an external device,  
such as a Remote Control Unit.  
Ext  
Int  
Ext  
Int  
: Displays mainly the status of external devices.  
: Displays mainly the status of the camera recorder.  
For specifying the illumination settings of the camera recorder’s front tally lamp during  
recording.  
Front Tally  
On  
On  
: Lights up only during recording.  
Blink  
Off  
Blink : Blinks after the [REC] trigger button is pressed until recording starts, and lights up  
during recording.  
Off  
: Turns off the tally lamp.  
For specifying the illumination settings of the camera recorder’s back tally lamp during  
recording.  
Back Tally  
On  
On  
: Lights up only during recording.  
Blink  
Off  
Blink : Blinks after the [REC] trigger button is pressed until recording starts, and lights up  
during recording.  
Off  
: Turns off the tally lamp.  
Ext  
For setting the recording trigger for the external recording device connected to the  
[IEEE1394] terminal.  
1394 Rec Trigger  
Series  
Split  
Ext  
: Outputs recording trigger to the external system only. (Recording is not  
performed by the internal system.)  
Series  
: Outputs recording trigger to enable consecutive recording by the internal  
and external systems.  
Synchronize  
Off  
Split  
: Outputs separate recording triggers to the internal and external systems.  
Synchronize : Outputs recording trigger simultaneously to the internal and external  
systems.  
Off  
: Recording trigger is not output to the external system.  
Memo :  
This item is selectable only in Camera mode. It cannot be set when recording is in  
progress on the camera recorder or an external device.  
When the external recording device connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal switches to the  
recording mode according to the settings, switching of operation mode using the  
[CAM/MEDIA] button and the Clip Review function will be disabled.  
When [1394 Rec Trigger] is set to ASplitB, the [REC] button on the side of the camera  
recorder becomes a Rec Start/Stop button for the external device. (A Page 12)  
When the [REC] button is pushed immediately after the power is turned on or after a  
menu setting is changed, recording with the external device might start about 10 seconds  
late.  
Enable  
For setting whether to automatically turn off the power of the external recording device  
connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal when the [POWER] switch of the camera recorder is  
turned off.  
1394 Auto Power  
Off  
Disable  
Enable : Turns off the power automatically.  
Disable : Disables this function.  
Memo :  
The IEEE1394 control is only valid for external devices with a POWER OFF button.  
On  
Off  
For specifying the illumination settings of the operation mode indicator on the side control  
panel of the camera recorder.  
Mode LED  
On  
Off  
: Lights up as below according to the operation mode. (A Page 8)  
: Turns off the indicator.  
Operation Mode  
Camera Mode  
Color  
Blue/Purple  
Green  
Media Mode (SD Card Mode)  
Media Mode (IEEE1394 Mode)  
USB Mode  
Orange  
Orange  
94  
         
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Reset All  
Setting Values  
Function  
^
Resets all menu settings.  
Select [Reset All] in the AResetB menu and press the Set button (R). The message  
AResetting...B appears. After the resetting process is complete, the message ACompleteB  
appears for about 1 second. Reset will not be performed if [Cancel] is selected.  
Memo :  
This item is not selectable when recording in Camera mode, during Clip Review, and in  
Media mode.  
^
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.  
Date/Time  
Time Zone  
Memo :  
The display order of the date (year, month, and day) follows the [Date Style] setting in the  
[Status Display] menu. However, the 24-hour format is used for the hour display  
UTC-00:30 to UTC-12:00, For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30 minutes.  
UTC,  
[Default values : UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E model)]  
UTC+14:00 to UTC+00:30  
(In increments of 30  
minutes)  
Memo :  
If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time] item is automatically adjusted when  
[Time Zone] is altered.  
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.  
System  
Information  
Memo :  
Under normal environment, dust will accumulate on the internal fan when the camera recorder is used over a long  
period. Dust may enter the camera recorder especially if it is used outdoors. This may affect the image and sound  
quality of the camera recorder. Check and replace the fan after every 9000 hours (suggested guideline).  
Fan Hour  
95  
     
Genlock Adjust Item  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Setting Values  
Function  
Min, -27 to 0 to 81, Max  
For adjusting the H phase of the SD analog signal of the camera recorder with respect to  
the external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
Increase value : Advances the H phase.  
Decrease value: Delays the H phase.  
Analog SD H  
Phase  
Min, -1023 to 0 to 1022,  
Max  
For adjusting the H phase of the HD analog signal of the camera recorder with respect to  
the external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
Increase value : Advances the H phase.  
Analog HD H  
Phase  
Decrease value: Delays the H phase.  
Memo :  
When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is set to ASD (DV)B, this item  
appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 75)  
Min, -372 to -1, 0, 1 to  
372, Max  
For adjusting the H phase of the SD-SDI signal of the camera recorder with respect to the  
external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
Increase value : Advances the H phase.  
SD-SDI H Phase  
HD-SDI H Phase  
Decrease value: Delays the H phase.  
Memo :  
When [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the [A/V Out] menu is set to a setting other than ASD (DV)B,  
this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 92)  
Min, -1023 to 0 to 1022,  
Max  
For adjusting the H phase of the HD-SDI signal of the camera recorder with respect to the  
external synchronizing signal input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
Increase value : Advances the H phase.  
Decrease value: Delays the H phase.  
Memo :  
When [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the [A/V Out] menu is set to a setting other than AHD-SDIB,  
this item appears as A---B and cannot be selected. (A Page 92)  
Memo :  
You can alter the setting value in increments of 10 by pressing down the cross-shaped button (JK) for 2 seconds or longer.  
(Excluding the [Analog SD H Phase] item)  
96  
   
Media Menu  
* Default values are indicated in bold characters.  
Item  
Function  
For formatting (initializing) an SDHC card.  
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Format] from [Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to format (initialize) the  
Format Media  
Restore Media  
For restoring an SDHC card.  
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Restore] from [Cancel]/[Restore], and press the Set button (R) to restore the SDHC  
Memo :  
This item appears only when the SDHC card needs to be restored. However, it is not selectable when recording in  
Camera mode and during Clip Review.  
Setup File Manage Menu  
Menu settings and button operations ([SHUTTER], [AE LEVEL], etc.) can be saved.  
It is useful to save settings according to different shooting conditions.  
Item  
Load File...  
Store File...  
Reset File...  
Setting Values  
Function  
^
^
^
Loads the settings. (A Page 121)  
Saves the settings. (A Page 120)  
Restores the saved settings to their default values. (A Page 121)  
97  
         
Adding/Editing Frequently  
Used Menu Items  
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu  
1 Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main Menu]  
screen.  
(Favorites Menu)  
2 Select the menu or submenu item to add.  
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu items freely  
to create a personal menu screen (Favorites Menu).  
Memo :  
[Favorites Menu] is valid only in Camera mode (except  
AUX mode), and remains common even when the  
recording format is changed.  
Up to 20 menu items can be added (two pages on the  
screen).  
Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset even  
when [Reset All] in the main menu is executed.  
[USER1] Button  
[USER2] Button  
Memo :  
Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be performed in  
the following cases. [USER1 Add] is displayed in gray in  
the operation guide.  
[MENU] Button  
Selected item is already added to [Favorites Menu].  
Number of menu items that can be added (20 items) is  
Set Button (R)  
exceeded.  
Cross-shaped  
Button  
(
JKH I)  
3 Press the [USER1] button.  
A screen to confirm the addition appears.  
[CANCEL] Button  
[STATUS] Button  
4 Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).  
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites Menu].  
4
Memo :  
Long descriptive names may be displayed for the menu  
items in [Favorites Menu] to enable better understanding.  
98  
   
4 Press the [USER2] button.  
Editing Favorites Menu  
You can delete or change the order of the items added to  
[Delete Mark] (  
) appears at the beginning of the item.  
[Favorites Menu].  
Delete Mark  
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]  
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.  
A Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main Menu]  
screen.  
B Press the [STATUS] button to open the [Favorites Menu]  
screen.  
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set button (R) or  
crossed-shaped button (I).  
Memo :  
The header turns magenta and the editing mode is activated.  
When the [USER2] button is pressed again while the  
menu item with [Delete Mark] (  
[Delete Mark] ( ) disappears.  
) is selected,  
5 Press the [USER1] button.  
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu] editing mode  
appears.  
2
6 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set button (R).  
6
Header  
(Magenta)  
Memo :  
Deletion is not complete until the changes are saved with  
[Save & Exit].  
To exit the editing mode without deleting any items, select  
[Exit without Saving].  
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].  
3 Select the menu or submenu item to delete.  
3
99  
 
2
Changing the Order of Items in  
[Favorites Menu]  
[USER1] Button  
[USER2] Button  
Header  
(Magenta)  
[MENU] Button  
Set Button (R)  
Cross-shaped  
Button  
(
JKH I)  
[CANCEL] Button  
[STATUS] Button  
3 Select the menu or submenu item to move and press  
the Set button (R).  
The moving mode is activated and a position selection bar  
for the move appears.  
1
Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.  
A Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main Menu]  
screen.  
B Press the [STATUS] button to open the [Favorites Menu]  
screen.  
3
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set button (R) or  
crossed-shaped button (I).  
The header turns magenta and the editing mode is activated.  
Position  
Selection Bar  
100  
4 Select the position to move to with the cross-shaped  
button (JK).  
Move the position selection bar with the cross-shaped  
button (JK) and select a position to move to.  
5 Press the Set button (R).  
The selected item moves to the new position.  
4
5
6 Press the [USER1] button.  
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu] editing mode  
appears.  
7 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set button (R).  
7
Memo :  
Moving is not complete until the changes are saved with  
[Save & Exit].  
To exit the editing mode without saving any changes,  
select [Exit without Saving].  
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].  
101  
Status Screen  
Status Screen in Camera  
Mode  
STATUS 0 Screen  
The STATUS 0 screen is not displayed in the AUX mode. (U model)  
M
L
DD  
20min  
Appears only when connected to an external device.  
K
J
I
H
G
A
B
1min  
1min  
RES  
F
B C  
D
E
A
Appears only when a warning is displayed. (A Page 104)  
Item  
Description  
----  
STBY  
REC  
: No card found in the selected slot *  
: Recording standby (recording pause)  
: Recording  
STBYC (displayed in yellow)  
A Media Status  
: Clip Continuous recording pause  
REVIEW : Clip Review (A Page 56)  
STBYP : Pre Rec recording standby (A Page 58) STOP  
POFF  
: Unable to record to the card in the slot  
: Power OFF  
RECP : Pre Rec recording (A Page 58)  
STBYC : Clip Continuous recording standby  
* When [Tally System] in the [Others] menu is set to AStudioB, A----B is not displayed even when a  
card is not inserted into the slot. Page 94)  
Indicates whether the brightness of the image is appropriate.  
B Iris Status Mark  
J
R
K
: Iris set higher than normal  
: Iris set to normal  
: Iris set lower than normal  
Displays F-number of the lens iris.  
C Iris F-Number  
This is not displayed for some lens types, and when the lens cable is disconnected.  
(OPEN, F2, F2.8, F4, F5.6, F8, F11, F16, CLOSE)  
Memo :  
You can specify the type of display and whether to display the information using [F.No/Iris Indicator] of  
[Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu. (  
Appears when the AE function is activated and [AE LEVEL] in the [Camera Function] menu is set to a  
value other than ANormalB. (A Page 78)  
D AE Level  
(AE-3, AE-2, AE-1, AE+1, AE+2, AE+3)  
Displays the gain value when it is not A0dBB.  
(3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC)  
E Gain  
Displays the current shutter speed when [Shutter] in the [Camera Function] menu is set to [Step]/  
[Variable] and the shutter is ON. (A Page 78)  
F Shutter  
EEI  
FAS  
: Displayed when [Shutter] is set to AEEIB (auto adjustment mode).  
: Displayed when shutter or gain is set to the auto adjustment mode.  
Memo :  
The variable range of the shutter speed varies according to the video format settings. (  
Displays the current white balance mode.  
A<**00K>, B<**00K>, P<**00K> ( **00 indicates color temperature)  
FAW : When the Fulltime Auto White balance mode is ON  
MANU : Manual White Balance mode (only during control using the Remote Control Unit)  
G White Balance Mode  
A
B
102  
       
Item  
H Black Toe  
Description  
Appears when [Black Toe] in the [Camera Process] menu is set to a value other than ANormalB.  
B+1 to B+5 : Displays the AStretch LevelB when [Black Toe] is set to AStretchB (Level 1 to Level 5)  
B-1 to B-5 : Displays the ACompress LevelB when [Black Toe] is set to ACompressB (Level 1 to Level 5)  
No display : When [Black Toe] is set to ANormalB  
Appears as AS.DTLB when the Skin Detail function is turned ON.  
I Skin Detail Operation  
SKIN AREA  
FOCUS  
: Blinks when the Skin Area display is ON.  
J Operation of Functions  
: Appears when the Focus Assist function is activated. When AACCU-FocusB is enabled,  
AACCU-FOCUSB blinks for about 10 seconds while Focus Assist starts up, after which  
the AFOCUSB indicator lights up. When [ACCU-Focus] is operating, it is forcibly turned  
OFF after recording starts. (A Page 89)  
Appears when the Spot Meter function is activated. For details of the display, refer to [Setting Spot Meter]  
K Luminance Information  
MAX : Maximum luminance  
MIN  
: Minimum luminance  
Displays the settings for about 3 seconds when the gain or shutter speed is manually changed.  
For other messages displayed in this area, refer to [Error Displays and Actions] (A Page 134).  
L Event/Warning Display  
Area  
Displayed Content  
GAIN **dB (** : 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18)  
GAIN ALC  
Setting Status  
Gain value is altered  
Gain is set to AALCB  
FULL AUTO ON, FULL AUTO OFF  
ZEBRA ON, ZEBRA OFF  
[FULL AUTO] is turned AON/OFFB  
[Zebra] is turned AON/OFFB  
[Focus Assist] is turned AON/OFFB  
Shutter speed is altered *1  
FOCUS ASSIST ON, FOCUS ASSIST OFF  
SHUTTER **  
(****K : 1/6, 1/6.25, 1/7.5, 1/12, 1/12.5, 1/15, 1/24, 1/  
25, 1/30, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/  
250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000)  
V. SHUTTER **** (**** : 1/24.01 to 1/1998.0)  
Variable shutter speed is altered *1  
SHUTTER OFF **  
Shutter is turned AOFFB *1  
(**** is the standard shutter value in the respective  
modes.)  
WHITE BAL * <****K>  
White balance value is altered  
(* : A, B, PRESET)  
(****, K indicates color temperature)  
WHITE BAL FAW  
FAW (Fulltime Auto White balance) is activated  
[ND FILTER] setting is altered  
FILTER ****  
(** : OFF,1/4ND,1/16ND)  
AE LEVEL **  
[AE LEVEL] value is altered  
(**** : -3, -2, -1, NORMAL, +1, +2, +3)  
SPOT METER ****  
(**** : ON, FIXED, OFF, SELECT)  
Spot meter status is changed  
BLACK NORMAL  
[Black Toe] is set to ANormalB  
BLACK STRETCH * (* : 1,2,3,4,5,)  
BLACK COMPRESS * (* : 1,2,3,4,5,)  
REC SWITCH LOCKED, REC SWITCH UNLOCKED  
[Stretch Level] of [Black Toe] is altered  
[Compress Level] of [Black Toe] is altered  
Record button lock switch is turned ON/OFF in  
Camera mode, or [REC] switch on the handle of  
the camera recorder is pressed while being  
locked  
SLOT SWITCHED * (* : A, B)  
TRIGGER TO EXT  
Active SDHC slot is switched automatically or  
using the [SLOT SELECT] button in Camera  
mode.  
Recording command is sent out from the  
[IEEE1394] terminal  
FRAME RATE rrrr/pp fps  
(rrrr : recording frame rate, pp : playback frame rate)  
Variable frame rate is adjusted using the cross-  
shaped button  
OK MARK ADDED, OK MARK DELETED  
OK mark is added or deleted  
Appears as xx/yy fps (xx: recording frame rate, yy: playback frame rate) only when AVariable FrameB is set  
in the [Rec Mode] menu. (A Page 76)  
M Frame Rate  
* 1 : The variable range of the shutter speed varies according to the video format settings. (A Page 41)  
103  
 
STATUS 1 Screen  
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)  
K
A
B
C
30/24 fps  
J
I
H
DD  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
SKIN AREA  
S.DTL  
B -3  
* 0  
STBY  
D
A<3200K>  
F5.6 AE+1 9dB 1/10000  
282min  
E
F
G
* 0  
Item  
A Resolution  
Description  
Displays the video image resolution.  
(1920
ן
1080, 1440
ן
1080, 1280
ן
720, 720
ן
480, 720
ן
576)  
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.  
B Frame Rate/Bit Rate  
(60p HQ, 30p HQ, 60i HQ, 60p SP, 30p SP, 60i SP, 50p HQ, 25p HQ, 50i HQ, 50p SP, 25p SP, 50i SP, 24p HQ,  
24p SP, 50i, 60i)  
Memo :  
Displayed as A60i AUXB in the external input recording mode. (U model)  
Appears when an OK mark is added. (A Page 68)  
Displays the remaining recording time of the SDHC cards in Slot A and Slot B separately.  
Memo :  
C OK Mark  
D Remaining Space on  
Media  
Only warnings are displayed in the STATUS 0 and STATUS 4 screens. (When the total remaining time for the  
SDHC cards in slot A and slot B is less than 3 minutes)  
A
A
A
: Currently selected slot. (White card)  
: SDHC card requires restoring or formatting, or SDHC card is not supported (not of Class 6/10 type).  
: Write-protect switch of SDHC card is set.  
!
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.  
E Voltage/Battery  
Power  
Display  
Description  
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.  
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be  
displayed in red as a warning.  
12.3V  
Currently powered by a battery.  
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is  
displayed.  
The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
12.3V  
200min  
30%  
RES  
Displays the audio level for CH-1 and CH-2.  
F Audio Level Meter  
-10 dB  
-20 dB  
When [Rec Mode] in the [Rec Mode] menu is set to AVariable FrameB, audio cannot  
be recorded and is indicated by the  
mark.  
The positions of -20 dB and -10 dB are displayed as AoB.  
Memo :  
You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Audio Meter] of [Status Display] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
104  
     
Item  
Description  
Displays the current ND filter position.  
G ND Filter Position  
No display : [ND FILTER] is set to AOFFB  
ND1/4  
: [ND FILTER] is set to A1/4B  
: [ND FILTER] is set to A1/16B  
ND1/16  
Memo :  
You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Filter] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu.  
Displays the remaining recording time of the external device (0 to 999). When the remaining time is running out,  
this is indicated in red (value + unit of measurement) as a warning to the user.  
H Remaining Space on  
External Device  
Memo :  
Only warnings are displayed in the STATUS 0 and STATUS 4 screens.  
Displays the operating status of the connected external device. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the  
corresponding external device.  
I Operation of External  
Device  
Memo :  
Only warnings are displayed in the STATUS 0 and STATUS 4 screens.  
Displays the time code (hour : minute : second : frame) or user’s bit data.  
J Time Code (TC)/  
User’s Bit (UB)  
Example :  
Time Code:  
00:00:00:00  
Colon (:) for non-drop frames  
Dot (.) for drop frames  
User’s Bit :  
FF EE DD 20  
Memo :  
You can turn ON/OFF the display using [TC/UB] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu.  
You can select whether to display the time code or user’s bit using the [TC DISPLAY] switch on the inner panel of  
the LCD monitor.  
This item is valid when [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.  
K Synchronization with  
External Time Code  
Generator  
Lights up  
: When the built-in time code generator is synchronized with the time code that is input to the  
[TC IN] terminal.  
Light goes out : When the signal is not synchronized, or when there is no time code input to the [TC IN]  
terminal.  
105  
STATUS 2 Screen  
G
F
E
D
C
B
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)  
282min  
Jan 2. 2009 01:23:45AM  
STBY  
* 1 : Same as STATUS 1 Screen (A Page 104)  
A
* 0  
* 1  
Item  
Description  
Displays the current date and time.  
A Date/Time  
Note :  
The date/time display style can be specified in [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] B [Date Style]/[Time  
Displays the remaining recording time of the SDHC cards in slot A and slot B separately.  
B Remaining Space on  
A
A
: Currently selected slot. (White card)  
MEDIA  
: SDHC card requires restoring or formatting, or SDHC card is not supported (not of Class 6/10  
!
type).  
A
: Write-protect switch of SDHC card is set.  
Displays the file format for recording to the SDHC card (File Format) that is specified at [File Format] in  
the [Record Format] menu. (A Page 75)  
C FORMAT  
Displays the status of the [AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2] switch. (A: AAUTOB/M: AMANUALB)  
D AUDIO  
Displays the settings from ABottom1B to ATop1B specified at [Zebra], and the settings from ABottom2B to  
ATop2B specified at [Zebra]. (A Page 89)  
E ZEBRA1/ZEBRA2 Values  
Memo :  
When [Zebra] in the menu is set to  
A
1Pattern  
B
, ZEBRA2 appears as  
A
---B  
Displays the subname of the setup file.  
F Subname of Setup File  
Memo :  
ARB appears at the beginning when changes are made to the loaded file. (A Page 119)  
Displays the type of the loaded file. (SCENE/PICTURE)  
G SETUP FILE  
106  
 
STATUS 3 Screen  
This screen displays a list of the functions assigned to the switches.  
* 1 : (Appears only during warnings)  
SWITCH ASSIGN  
A
B
FAW  
NONE  
GAIN [ L / M / H ] 0dB / 9dB / 12dB  
USER 1  
USER 2  
USER 3  
RET  
SKIN/SPOT  
AE LEVEL  
BARS  
B.STRETCH3  
LOAD FILE  
CLIP REVIEW  
SPOT METER  
AE LEVEL/VFR  
C
D
E
F
STBY  
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)  
* 1 : Same as STATUS 1 Screen (A Page 104)  
* 2 : Same as STATUS 2 Screen (A Page 106)  
Jan 2. 2008 01:23:45AM  
282min  
* 0  
* 1  
* 2  
Item  
Description  
Displays the position of the [WHT.BAL.] selection switch that is assigned with the FAW function.  
(NONE, A, B, PRESET)  
A [FAW] Function  
Assignment  
Displays the setting values for each of the positions ([L]/[M]/[H]) on the [GAIN] switch.  
B [GAIN] Switch Settings  
(0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, ALC)  
Displays the setting status of the [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3] buttons.  
(NONE, BARS, B.STRETCH*, B.COMPRESS*, RET, LOAD FILE)  
* indicates 1 to 5  
C [USER1,USER2,USER3]  
Button Function Settings  
Displays the setting status of the [RET] button on the lens.  
(CLIP REVIEW, RETURN, FOCUS ASSIST, OK MARK)  
D [RET] Button Function  
Settings  
Displays the setting status of the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch.  
(SKIN AREA, SPOT METER)  
E [SKIN AREA/SPOT  
METER] Switch Settings  
Displays the functions assigned to the left/right (H I) of the cross-shaped button.  
F Cross-Shaped Button (H I)  
(DISABLE, AE LEVEL, AE LEVEL/VFR)  
Function Assignment  
STATUS 4 Screen  
This screen displays the event. It is also used to display warnings only.  
* 0  
30/24 fps  
DD  
20 min  
Appears only when connected to an external device (A Page 104)  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
* 0  
A
B
1min  
1min  
RES  
STBY  
* 0 : Same as STATUS 0 Screen (A Page 102)  
* 0  
* 1 (Appears only during warnings)  
* 1 : Same as STATUS 1 Screen (A Page 104)  
107  
 
Status Screen in SD Card  
Mode  
These are the status screens displayed in Media mode (SD Card mode, Media mode).  
STATUS 0 Screen  
This screen displays the media status or event. It is also used to display warnings only.  
STATUS 1 and STATUS 2 Screens  
F
F
A
B
C D E  
A
B C D E  
J
I
H
G
K
J
I
H
G
STATUS 1 Screen  
STATUS 2 Screen  
Item  
Description  
Appears when an OK mark is added. (A Page 68)  
A OK Mark  
B Resolution  
Displays the video image resolution.  
(1920
ן
1080, 1440
ן
1080, 1280
ן
720, 720
ן
480, 720
ן
576)  
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.  
C Frame Rate/Bit Rate  
(60p HQ, 30p HQ, 60i HQ, 60p SP, 30p SP, 60i SP, 50p HQ, 25p HQ, 50i HQ, 50p SP, 25p SP, 50i SP, 24p  
HQ, 24p SP, 50i, 60i)  
Displays the media slot (A or B) of the currently played clip.  
A key mark appears when the write-protect switch of the SDHC card is set.  
D Media  
Displays current clip number/total number of clips.  
E Clip Information  
Displays the time code (hour : minute : second : frame) or user’s bit data.  
F Time Code (TC)/  
TC  
UB  
: Time code  
: User’s bit  
User’s Bit (UB)  
The framing mode display for the time code is as follows.  
00:00:00:00  
Colon (:) for non-drop frames  
Dot (.) for drop frames  
Memo :  
You can turn ON/OFF the display using [TC/UB] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu.  
You can select whether to display the time code or user’s bit using the [TC DISPLAY] switch on the inner  
panel of the LCD monitor.  
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the currently played SDHC card.  
G Date/Time  
Note :  
The date/time display style can be specified in [LCD/VF] menu B [Status Display] B [Date Style]/  
108  
   
Item  
Description  
Displays the audio level for CH-1 and CH-2.  
The positions of -20 dB and -10 dB are displayed as AoB.  
H Audio Level Meter  
-10 dB  
-20 dB  
Memo :  
You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Audio Meter] of [Status Display] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.  
I
Voltage/  
Battery Power  
Display  
Description  
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.  
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be  
displayed in red as a warning.  
12.3V  
Currently powered by a battery.  
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is  
displayed.  
12.3V  
200min  
30%  
Memo :  
The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the  
RES  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
PLAY  
STILL  
: Playing  
: Still picture playback mode  
J Media Status  
FWD * : High-speed playback in the forward direction (* playback speed: 5x or 15x)  
REV *  
STOP  
POFF  
: High-speed playback in the reverse direction (* reverse playback speed: 5x or 15x)  
: Stop mode  
: Power OFF  
Displays a guide for the current operation buttons.  
K Operation Guide  
Status Screen in IEEE1394  
Input Mode  
These are the status screens displayed in Media mode (IEEE1394 Input mode).  
STATUS 1 Screen  
RES  
* Appears only when a warning is displayed. [Voltage/Remaining Battery Power] (A Page 110)  
STATUS 2 Screen  
1280x720  
24p HQ  
B
A
282min  
D
C
109  
   
Item  
Description  
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs. (60p HQ, 30p HQ, 60i HQ, 60p SP, 30p SP, 60i SP, 50p HQ, 25p  
HQ, 50i HQ, 50p SP, 25p SP, 50i SP, 24p HQ, 24p SP, 50i, 60i)  
A Frame Rate/Bit Rate  
Displays the video image resolution. (1920
ן
1080, 1440
ן
1080, 1280
ן
720, 720
ן
480, 720
ן
576)  
B Resolution  
Displays the audio level for CH-1 and CH-2.  
C Audio Level Meter  
-10 dB  
-20 dB  
A
mark is displayed when the audio format is not supported in the IEEE1394  
mode. (32k, 44.1k)  
The positions of -20 dB and -10 dB are displayed as AoB.  
Memo :  
You can turn ON/OFF the display using [Audio Meter] of [Status Display] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.  
D Voltage/Remaining  
Battery Power  
Display  
Description  
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.  
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be  
displayed in red as a warning.  
12.3V  
Currently powered by a battery.  
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is  
displayed.  
12.3V  
200min  
30%  
Memo :  
The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
RES  
Enlarged Status Display on  
LCD Monitor  
You can enlarge and display only the characters of the status screen on the LCD monitor.  
CH1  
A
CH2  
B
C
DF  
FREE  
J
I
STBY  
STOP  
REC REVIEW  
DD  
1280 x 720  
60p HQ  
STBY  
A
min  
100min  
67.8min  
D
123 min  
B
OK  
E
F G  
H
Item  
Description  
Displays the audio levels of [CH-1] and [CH-2].  
A Audio Level Meter  
If the reference audio level (A-20dBB or A-12dBB) is exceeded, this is displayed in yellow. The AOverB area is  
displayed in red. A48kB is the sampling frequency.  
Memo :  
When [Rec Mode] in the [Rec Mode] menu is set to AVariable FrameB, audio cannot be recorded and is  
indicated by the  
mark.  
Displays the framing mode.  
[DF] : Drop frame  
[NDF] : Non-drop frame  
B Framing Mode  
110  
   
Item  
Description  
Displays the operation mode of the time code. (Display: [FREE], [RECR], [REGN], [EXT], [EXT L]) (A Page 48)  
This item appears as AEXTB when [TCG Source] in the [TC/UB] menu is set to AExternalB.  
L indicates the synchronizing status of the built-in time code generator with respect to the time code that is  
input to the [TC IN] terminal.  
C Time Code Generator  
Lights up  
: During synchronization with the external time code.  
Light goes out : When the signal is not synchronized, or when there is no time code input.  
Displays the SDHC card status in characters and symbols.  
D Media Status  
----  
STBY  
REC  
: No card found in the selected slot  
: Recording standby (recording pause)  
: Recording  
STBYC (displayed in yellow)  
: Clip Continuous recording pause  
REVIEW : Clip Review (A Page 56)  
STBYP : Pre Rec recording standby (A Page 58)  
RECP : Pre Rec recording (A Page 58)  
STBYC : Clip Continuous recording standby  
STOP  
POFF  
: Unable to record to the card in the slot  
: Power OFF  
Displays the remaining recording time on the SDHC card. The currently active slot is indicated using an  
enlarged card icon with black characters and a white background. A key mark appears when the write-protect  
switch of the SDHC card is set.  
E Remaining Space on  
Media  
Appears as [OK] when the currently played clip is appended with an OK mark.  
F OK Mark  
Displays the video format that is set. (A Page 38)  
G
Video Format  
Memo :  
Displayed as A60i AUXB in the external input recording mode. (U model)  
Displays the current status of the power supply in use.  
H Voltage/  
Battery Power  
Display  
Description  
Currently powered by an AC adapter. The current voltage is shown on the right.  
If the supplied voltage from the AC adapter is low, the voltage value will be displayed in  
red as a warning.  
12.3V  
Currently powered by a battery.  
When the battery power runs out, the battery mark appears hollow, and ARESB is displayed.  
12.3V  
200min  
30%  
Memo :  
The display on the right can be set using [Battery Info] of [Status Display] in the  
[LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 91)  
RES  
Displays the operating status of the connected external device.  
I Operation of External  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding external device.  
Device  
Displays the time code (hour : minute : second : frame) or user’s bit data.  
J Time Code (TC)/  
User’s Bit (UB)  
00:00:00:00  
Colon (:) for non-drop frames  
Dot (.) for drop frames  
Memo :  
During enlarged display of the status on the LCD monitor screen, the video image remains displayed on the viewfinder.  
111  
 
Camera Features  
Marker and Safety Zone  
Displays (Camera Mode  
Only, Excluding AUX Mode)  
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in helping you determine the angle of view for the image according to the  
shooting purpose.  
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = ALine+HalftoneB, and [Center Mark] = AOnB  
Center Mark  
Safety Zone  
Aspect Marker  
You can turn ON/OFF the safety zone and center mark displays as shown below using the [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone] and  
[Center Mark] settings of [Marker Setting] in the [LCD/VF] menu. (A Page 90)  
[Aspect Marker] Display  
When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B  
[Line]  
[Halftone]  
[Line+Halftone]  
[Aspect Marker] Display for Different  
[Aspect Ratio] Settings  
When [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB  
[4:3]  
[14:9]  
[16:9]/[16:9 (+4:3)]  
[2.35:1 Center]  
[2.35:1C.HeadRM]  
[1.85:1 Center]  
[1.85:1C.HeadRM]  
[1.66:1]  
[1.75:1]  
112  
   
[Safety Zone] Display  
When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB, and [Center Mark] = AOnB  
[Off]  
[95%]  
[93%]  
[90%]  
[88%]  
[80%]  
[Center Mark] Display  
When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB, and [Safety Zone] = A80%B  
[Off]  
[On]  
When [Aspect Ratio] = A4:3B, [Aspect Marker] = AHalftoneB, and [Safety Zone] = AOffB  
[Off]  
[On]  
113  
Color Range Setting  
Smoothening the Skin Color  
(Skin Detail Function)  
1 Place the cursor at [Skin Color Range] with the cross-  
shaped button (JK).  
2 Press the Set button (R) or cross-shaped button (I) to  
move the cursor to a setting value.  
The Skin Detail function can be used to reduce the contour  
enhancement of video signals for only the skin areas so as to  
produce a smoother skin tone.  
Preparations Before Using the Skin Detail  
Function (Skin Adjust Function)  
1
Adjust the white balance. (  
2
2 Display the [Skin Color Adjust] screen. (A Page 84)  
Select [Main Menu] screen  
B
[Camera Process] menu  
B
3 Select a setting value using the cross-shaped  
[Detail]/[Adjust]  
B
[Skin Color Adjust], and press the Set  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
button (R).  
The entire image switches to black-and-white display,  
leaving only the detected skin areas in color.  
Select a setting within the [Narrow, -1 to -9, Normal, 9 to 1,  
Wide] range.  
4 Place the cursor at [Back] after setting is complete,  
and press the Set button (R).  
Skin Color  
Detection Frame  
The data is saved, and the screen returns to the [Detail]  
menu.  
Using the Skin Detail Function  
1 Set [Skin Detect] to AOnB. (A Page 84)  
Memo :  
The displays for [Bars], [Zebra] and [Focus Assist] are  
temporarily set to AOffB, while the [B & W] display in  
[VF Display] temporarily switches to AColorB.  
Select [Main Menu] screen B [Camera Process] menu B  
[Detail]/[Adjust] B [Skin Detect] and set to AOnB.  
AS.DTLB appears on the STATUS 0 and 1 screens of the  
LCD monitor and viewfinder when the Skin Detail function  
is activated.  
Hue Range Detection  
AS.DTLB appears  
1 Project the detected object inside the skin color  
1280x720 30/24 fps  
24p HQ  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
detection frame.  
OK  
2 Place the cursor at [Skin Color Detect] with the  
cross-shaped button (JK).  
MAX 123%  
MIN 45%  
SKIN AREA  
S.DTL  
3 Press the Set button (R).  
Display switches from AStopB to AExecuteB, and detection  
A
B
STBY  
100min  
100min  
B -3  
starts.  
ND1/16 A<3200K>  
282min  
Memo :  
AErrorB is displayed if the object inside the frame is not  
STATUS 1 Screen  
within the preset color range.  
2 Set the adjustment level for the contour enhancement  
4 Press the Set button (R) after the desired hue range is  
of the skin tone. (A Page 84)  
detected.  
Set using [Main Menu] screen B [Camera Process] menu B  
[Detail]/[Adjust] B [Skin Color Detect]/[Level].  
If no  
ends.  
If Error  
A
Error  
B
is displayed, the data is saved and the process  
A
B
appears, the process ends without saving the data.  
5 Place the cursor at [Back] after the hue range is  
detected, and press the Set button (R).  
Returns to the [Detail] menu screen.  
114  
   
Color Bar Output  
Checking the Preset Hue Area  
1 Set the [ZEBRA ON/OFF] switch at the front of the  
camera recorder to the [SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] end.  
Doing so forcibly turns ON the Skin Adjust function  
temporarily, and the preset hue area is displayed in color on  
the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
Multi-format color bars can be output on this camera  
recorder.  
[USER1,USER2,USER3]  
Buttons  
[FULL AUTO]  
Switch  
[ZEBRA ON/OFF]  
Switch  
Memo :  
Setting  
When [Color Gain] in the [Camera Process] menu is set to  
AOffB, only the area where Skin Detail is functioning is  
displayed in skin tone. (A Page 83)  
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure below.  
1
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to AOFFB.  
When [SKIN A./SPOT M.] of [Switch Set] in the  
[Camera Function] menu screen is set to ASpot MeterB,  
the hue area cannot be checked using the  
[SKIN AREA/SPOT METER] switch. (A Page 80)  
2 Set [Bars] in the [Camera Function] menu to AOnB.  
Color bars are output.  
Color Bar Output Using the USER Buttons  
1 Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to AOFFB.  
2 Assign ABarsB to any one of the [USER1]/[USER2]/  
[USER3] buttons.  
Set using [USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] of [Switch Set] in the  
[Camera Function] menu. (A Page 79)  
3 Press the corresponding [USER1]/[USER2]/  
[USER3] button that is assigned with ABarsB.  
Color bars are output.  
Memo :  
During color bar output, you can select whether to output  
the reference audio signals using [Test Tone] in the  
[Audio Set] menu. (A Page 77)  
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to AONB and [Bars]  
in the [FULL AUTO] menu is set to AOffB, color bars are  
not output in the AUX and Media modes.  
115  
 
R&Yl R Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
R
Color Matrix Adjustment  
Mg  
I
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
YI  
YI  
B
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be adjusted to a  
color of the user’s preference.  
G
Cy  
R&Yl Yl Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
When shooting is performed using multiple cameras, the  
colors of the different cameras can be adjusted, and a color  
of the user’s preference can be set on this camera recorder.  
13 saturation parameters and 3 hue parameters are available  
for adjustment. Adjust the color on the vector scope and  
waveform monitor using the color chart.  
R
Mg  
I
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
B
* The adjusted values of AStandardB, ACinema VividB, and  
ACinema SubduedB in [Color Matrix] can be stored  
individually. (A Page 83)  
G
Cy  
Yl&G Yl Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
R
R
R
R
Mg  
I
1
Select [Color Matrix] or [Adjust] in the [Camera Process]  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
YI  
YI  
YI  
YI  
B
B
B
B
2 Adjust the saturation.  
G
G
G
G
Cy  
Mg  
Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to select a value.  
The correction range (gray area in the chart below) for each  
of the 12 levels from [Mg&R Mg Level] to [B&Mg Mg Level]  
changes in the direction indicated by the arrow on the vector  
scope.  
Yl&G G Level  
G&Cy G Level  
G&Cy Cy Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
I
I
I
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
Cy  
Mg  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
Cross-Shaped Button  
(JK)  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
Cy  
Mg  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
Memo :  
Cy  
In addition to the vector, the luminance Y level of the  
correction range changes as well.  
Cy&B Cy Level  
Increase the value:  
R
R
Mg  
Corrected Y decreases  
I
I
Mg&R Mg Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
R
Mg  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
YI  
YI  
I
B
B
YI  
YI  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
G
G
B
Cy  
Mg  
G
Cy&B B Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
Cy  
Mg  
Mg&R R Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
R
I
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
B
Cy  
G
Cy  
116  
 
4 Adjust the hue.  
B&Mg B Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
R
R
Mg  
I
I
Adjust the hue based on the R-, G-, and B-axes.  
As illustrated in the chart below, increasing the value rotates  
the hue in the anti-clockwise direction on the vector scope,  
with the respective axes as the center. Decreasing the value  
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction.  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
YI  
YI  
B
B
G
G
Cy  
Mg  
R Rotation  
G Rotation  
B Rotation  
Increase the value:  
R
R
R
B&Mg Mg Level  
Increase the value:  
Corrected Y decreases  
Mg  
Hue rotates in the anti-  
clockwise direction with  
R-axis as the center.  
I
I
I
YI  
YI  
YI  
Decrease the value:  
Corrected Y increases  
B
B
B
G
G
G
Cy  
Mg  
Cy  
Increase the value:  
Hue rotates in the anti-  
clockwise direction with  
G-axis as the center.  
3 Adjust Yl&G Mask Range.  
Adjusting [Yl&G Yl Level] and [Yl&G G Level] may also affect  
the I-axis (color close to the skin tone). When [Yl&G Yl Level]  
is increased, the skin tone becomes slightly more yellowish.  
On the other hand, when [Yl&G G Level] is increased, the  
skin tone becomes slightly more greenish.  
Cy  
Mg  
Increase the value:  
Adjust [Yl&G Mask Range] if you want to increase YI&G  
toward yellow and green without affecting the skin tone. As  
illustrated in the chart below, [Yl&G Mask Range] adjusts the  
gray area from the R-axis, which disables the [Yl&G Yl Level]  
and [Yl&G G Level] adjustments.  
Increasing the [Yl&G Mask Range] value widens the  
masking range. By doing so, the effect on the I-axis (color  
close to the skin tone) due to adjustments of [Yl&G Yl Level]  
and [Yl&G G Level] is reduced. However, this also reduces  
the amount of correction by [Yl&G Yl Level] and  
Hue rotates in the anti-  
clockwise direction with  
B-axis as the center.  
Cy  
[Yl&G G Level].  
Yl&G Mask Range  
R
Mg  
I
YI  
B
G
Cy  
[Yl&G Yl Level] and [Yl&G G Level]  
adjustment  
117  
Reproduction of Dark Areas  
(Black Stretch/Compress  
Function)  
Process the dark areas according to the balance of bright  
and dark areas in the image to adjust the overall balance of  
contrast.  
1 Adjust [Black Toe] in the [Camera Process] menu  
according to the captured video signals.  
2 Set the luminance point (Point Level) for AStretchB or  
ACompressB.  
Decide the luminance point (Point Level) at which the dark  
areas in the image are to be stretched or compressed.  
The luminance point (Point Level) can be set within the  
range of A5% to 15%B.  
3 Adjust the amount of AStretchB or ACompressB.  
Set the amount to stretch or compress the dark areas in  
the image using [Stretch Level] or [Compress Level].  
The amount of stretch or compression increases when a  
larger value is specified.  
Example  
To increase the area of 10 % level (Point A in the figure  
below) in the image under normal condition ([Black Toe] is  
ANormalB)  
A Set [Black Toe] to AStretchB.  
B Set [Point Level] to A10%B.  
C Set the amount to increase using [Stretch Level] (ALevel  
1 to Level 5B).  
The reproduction of dark areas improves as the 10 % level  
point A stretches toward point B. (See figure below)  
OUTPUT  
When [Black Toe] is  
AStretchB  
When [Black Toe] is  
ANormalB  
Increasing the A10%B area  
B
[Point Level] set at A10%B  
A
0
0
INPUT  
5%  
10% 15%  
118  
 
Number of Storable Setup Files  
Configuring Setup Files  
Camera recorder  
SDHC Card  
Slot A  
: [CAM1] ~ [CAM4]  
: A[EXT1] ~ A[EXT8]  
: B[EXT1] ~ B[EXT8]  
Slot B  
The menu settings can be stored on the camera recorder or  
an SDHC card by saving them as a setup file.  
Loading a saved setup file enables you to reproduce the  
appropriate setup state speedily.  
Preset Setup Files  
As described below, there are three types of scene files and  
two types of picture files that can be loaded according to  
different shooting conditions.  
Two types of setup files are available.  
Scene file  
Scene file:  
[GY-HD 60p LIKE] : Setting is adjusted according to the  
tone of the GY-HD series.  
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from video  
format settings to image creation settings such as device  
settings and shooting conditions, as well as the contents of  
the [Favorites Menu].  
[Camera Resolution] is set to  
A1280x720B, and [Frame & Bit Rate]  
is set to 60p (HQ)  
A
B.  
Picture file:  
[GY-HD 50p LIKE] : Setting is adjusted according to the  
tone of the GY-HD series.  
File that contains image creation settings in accordance to  
the shooting conditions ([Camera Process] menu items).  
[Camera Resolution] is set to  
A1280x720B, and [Frame & Bit Rate]  
is set to 50p (HQ)  
A
B.  
[CINEMA 1080/24p] : Setting that is suited for movie-like  
video shooting.  
Make use of the [Setup File Manage] menu to save or load a  
setup file.  
The following operations can be performed on the [Setup File  
Manage] menu.  
[Camera Resolution] is set to  
A1920x1080B, and [Frame & Bit Rate]  
is set to 24p (HQ)  
A
B.  
Saving setup files (A Page 120)  
Loading a setup file (A Page 121)  
Resetting a saved file (A Page 121)  
Picture file  
[GY-HD LIKE]  
: Setting is adjusted according to the  
tone of the GY-HD series.  
[CINEMA]  
: Setting that is suited for movie-like  
video shooting.  
Memo :  
The above setup files are used exclusively for loading. They  
cannot be overwritten or reset.  
Compatibility  
Scene file  
Scene files saved using the GY-HM700 series cannot be  
loaded using this camera recorder.  
Scene files saved using this camera recorder cannot be  
loaded using the GY-HM700 series.  
Picture file  
Picture files saved using the GY-HM700 series can be  
loaded using this camera recorder. When the  
[Alternative Temp.] setting is not available on the  
GY-HM700 series, it is set to the default value.  
JVC does not provide guarantee that picture files saved  
using this camera recorder can be loaded using the  
GY-HM700 series.  
119  
   
Operating instructions of software keyboard (A Page 71)  
A
B
F
Saving Setup Files  
C
1
Display the [Setup File Manage] menu.  
G
H
Select the [Setup File Manage] menu on the [Main Menu]  
screen, and press the Set button (R). (A Page 97)  
D
2 Select [Store File] and press the Set button (R).  
E
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and press the Set  
button (R).  
Memo :  
The existing files are displayed.  
When overwriting an existing file, the subname of the  
existing file is displayed.  
4 Select the file to be newly saved (or overwritten)  
using the cross-shaped button (JK), and press the Set  
button (R).  
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or press the  
[CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.  
Name  
Description  
Cursor  
Field for entering the title.  
You can enter up to 8 characters for the  
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname.  
A
B
Character Entry Field  
Select a character using the key cursor  
, and press the Set button (R) to input  
Character Cursor  
D
the selected character at the position of  
the character cursor. The character  
cursor moves to the next position on the  
right each time a character is input.  
The cursor can be moved using the  
[Store File] Menu Screen  
arrow keys  
Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I  
to move the key cursor to the  
F.  
Memo :  
)
C
D
E
Character Keys  
Key Cursor  
Files cannot be written in the following cases. (Displayed in  
gray, selection disabled)  
D
character you want to enter.  
The inserted SDHC card is not supported (those other  
than SDHC Class 6/10 cards, or unformatted cards).  
(File name appears as A---B. )  
When a write-protected SDHC card is inserted (a  
mark appears beside the SDHC card icon.)  
Indicates the currently selected  
character or item. Use the cross-shaped  
button (JKH I) to move the cursor.  
Select [Store] and press the Set  
Confirmation Buttons  
button (  
Select [Cancel] and press the Set  
button ( ) to abort character input and  
R) to confirm the title.  
R
5 Name the file.  
Enter the subname using the software keyboard.  
return to the previous screen.  
Moves the position of the character  
F
G
Arrow Keys  
cursor  
Select [BS] and press the Set  
button ( ) to delete the character on the  
left of the character cursor  
Select [SP] and press the Set  
button ( ) to enter a space at the current  
position of the character cursor  
B.  
[BS] Backspace Key  
R
B
.
H
[SP] Space Key  
R
B.  
6 Select [Store] from the confirmation buttons E, and  
press the Set button (R).  
A confirmation screen appears.  
7 Select [Store] on the confirmation screen, and press  
the Set button (R).  
Saving starts, and AStoring...B appears on the screen.  
120  
 
5 Select [Load] on the confirmation screen, and press  
the Set button (R).  
Loading starts, and ALoading...B appears on the screen.  
7
5
Memo :  
If you do not want to save the file, select [Cancel] or press  
the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.  
When saving of a file fails, a AStore Error!B message  
(indicated in red frame) appears for several seconds, after  
which the previous screen is displayed.  
Memo :  
If you do not want to load the file, select [Cancel] or press  
the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.  
When loading of a file fails, a ALoad Error!B message  
(indicated in red frame) appears for several seconds, after  
which the previous screen is displayed.  
8 Saving is complete.  
After saving of the file is complete, ACompleteB appears on  
the screen, and the menu screen closes automatically.  
6 Loading is complete.  
After loading of the file is complete, ACompleteB appears on  
the screen, and the menu screen closes automatically.  
Loading a Setup File  
1 Display the [Setup File Manage] menu.  
Select the [Setup File Manage] menu on the [Main Menu]  
screen, and press the Set button (R). (A Page 97)  
Resetting Setup Files  
1 Display the [Setup File Manage] menu.  
2 Select [Load File] and press the Set button (R).  
Select the [Setup File Manage] menu on the [Main Menu]  
screen, and press the Set button (R). (A Page 97)  
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and press the Set  
button (R).  
2 Select [Reset File] and press the Set button (R).  
The existing files are displayed.  
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and press the Set  
4 Select the file to load using the cross-shaped  
button (R).  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
The existing files are displayed.  
4 Select the file to delete using the cross-shaped  
Cursor  
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).  
Memo :  
Scene files and preset scene files stored inside the SDHC  
card cannot be selected or reset.  
5 Select [Reset] on the confirmation screen, and press  
the Set button (R).  
[Load File] Menu Screen  
Deletion starts, and AResetting...B appears on the screen.  
Memo :  
When the write-protect switch of the inserted SDHC card  
Memo :  
If you do not want to reset the file, select [Cancel] or press  
the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous screen.  
is set, a  
mark appears beside the SDHC card icon.  
Setup files can be loaded from an SDHC card even if the  
write-protect switch is set.  
A  
mark is displayed at the right end when there are  
some settings that are not supported by the setup file  
(e.g., picture files saved using the GY-HM700 series).  
These files can be loaded by this camera recorder, but  
some of the settings will not be compatible. (A Page 119)  
Setup files that are completely incompatible will not be  
displayed. (A Page 119)  
6 Resetting is complete.  
After resetting of the file is complete, ACompleteB appears on  
the screen, and the menu screen closes automatically.  
121  
   
Connecting External Devices  
Connecting an External  
Monitor  
Connecting via SDI  
Either HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals can be output from the  
[HD/SD-SDI] terminal (BNC) on the terminal area of the  
camera recorder.  
Digital video signals, together with embedded  
(superimposed) audio signals and time code signals, are  
output for both the HD-SDI and SD-SDI signals.  
To output live or playback video images and audio sound to  
an external monitor, select the output signals from the  
camera recorder, and connect using an appropriate cable  
according to the monitor to be used.  
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD-SDI] output terminal is  
used as a flag to determine valid video signals. Therefore,  
accurate values will not be output.  
Memo :  
Connecting via Composite/Component  
Output  
Either component or composite signals can be output from the  
BNC terminals on the terminal area of the camera recorder.  
Connect the external monitor to the [Y/VIDEO] output terminal  
for composite signals, or to [Y/VIDEO], [PB], and [PR] video  
signal output terminals for component signals.  
The sampling frequency for embedded (superimposed)  
audio signals is 48 kHz. Time code of the built-in time  
generator as well as playback time code are also output.  
* Select the output signal using [HD/SD-SDI Out] in the  
[A/V Out] menu. (A Page 92)  
* When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is  
set to ASD (DV)B, only SD-SDI signals are output.  
* Select the output signal using [Output Terminal] in the  
[A/V Out] menu. (  
* To display menu screens or status screens on the external  
monitor, set [Analog Out Char.] in the [A/V Out] menu to  
* To display menu screens or status screens on the external  
monitor, set [SDI Out Char.] in the [A/V Out] menu to AOnB.  
AOn  
[AUDIO OUTPUT]  
Component Output  
[Y/VIDEO], [PB], [PR]  
Composite Output  
[Y/VIDEO]  
[HD/SD-SDI]  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT IN  
AUDIO IN  
SDI IN  
Settings for Composite Output  
Settings for SDI Output  
1
Down convert the signals.  
1
Down convert the signals.  
You can select the method to Adown convertB HD video  
images to SD images during composite output.  
You can select the method to Adown convertB HD video  
images to SD images during SD-SDI output.  
Set using [Down Convert] in the [A/V Out] menu.  
The available modes include ASide CutB, ALetter BoxB  
(blackened at the top and bottom), and ASqueezeB (full size,  
compressed at the left and right). (A Page 92)  
Set using [Down Convert] in the [A/V Out] menu.  
The available modes include ASide CutB, ALetter BoxB  
(blackened at the top and bottom), and ASqueezeB (full size,  
compressed at the left and right). (A Page 92)  
Memo :  
Memo :  
When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is  
set to ASD (DV)B, selection cannot be made. (A Page 75)  
When [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu is  
set to ASD (DV)B, selection cannot be made. (A Page 75)  
2 Add setup signals.  
Setup signals can be added to the output video signals  
during composite output.  
* You can select whether to add setup signals using [Set Up]  
in the [A/V Out] menu. (A Page 92)  
122  
   
IEEE1394 Connection  
[PHONES] Terminal  
Audio output from the [PHONES] terminal can be selected  
using [Audio Monitor] in the [A/V Out] menu (A Page 93) as  
well as the [MONITOR SELECT] switch on the camera  
recorder.  
The different combinations of settings that are output from  
the [PHONES] terminal and monitor speaker are as follows.  
“ Backup recording ” can be performed, which allows the  
same image recorded to the SDHC card on the camera  
recorder to be recorded to the external device connected to  
the IEEE1394 terminal. (A Page 124)  
[MONITOR  
SELECT]  
Switch  
[PHONES]  
Terminal  
[Audio Monitor]  
Settings  
Speaker  
L
R
Settings  
[CH-1]  
^
[Mix]  
[Stereo]  
^
CH1  
CH1+CH2  
CH1 CH2  
CH1  
[BOTH]  
CH1+CH2  
[CH-2]  
CH2  
CH2  
[IEEE1394] Terminal  
Note :  
When connecting the camera recorder to an external  
device using an IEEE1394 cable, make sure to observe  
the following. Improper connection may cause the circuit  
of the connected unit to malfunction.  
Turn off the power of the camera recorder and  
connected devices before connecting the IEEE1394  
cable.  
Do not connect the cable in an environment where  
static electricity occurs or is likely to occur.  
Make sure that each camera recorder is connected to  
only one external device at any one time.  
When the video format input from the [IEEE1394] terminal  
is different from the video format of the camera recorder, a  
AVIDEO FORMAT INCORRECTB message is  
displayed. Set according to the video format entered for  
[System Definition], [Camera Resolution], and  
[Frame & Bit Rate] in the [Record Format] menu.  
VIDEO FORMAT  
INCORRECT  
If the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 interface terminal switch is set  
at AEXTB and the AHQB mode is selected in  
[Frame & Bit Rate], signals will not be output from the  
[IEEE1394] terminal. (A Page 75)  
123  
 
5 Set the external device to a mode that enables  
recording.  
For setting and operation of external devices, refer to the  
instruction manual of the respective devices.  
Note :  
Adjust the camera recorder and external device to the same  
IEEE1394 settings.  
Backup Recording  
When the camera recorder is set to Camera mode, images  
shot using it can be stream output from the IEEE1394  
terminal.  
According to the recording operation on the camera recorder,  
recording to the camera recorder and external device may be  
performed synchronously or separately.  
Start recording only after ensuring that the devices are  
properly connected.  
6 Perform recording using the camera recorder.  
If the settings in 3 are appropriate, video images will be  
recorded to the camera recorder and external device.  
1
Connect the camera recorder to the backup device.  
Note :  
Images, audio and time code at the points where recording  
starts and ends may be out of sync depending on the  
camera recorder and backup device in use.  
Connect the camera recorder to the backup device using an  
IEEE1394 cable, using the camera recorder as the master  
device.  
Memo :  
When backup recording starts, a ATRIGGER TO EXTB  
message appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder for  
about 3 seconds.  
Camera recorder  
(Master Device)  
Checking Videos Recorded on the  
External Device  
[IEEE1394]  
Terminal  
(IEEE1394 Input mode of Media mode)  
When images are displayed in thumbnails in Media mode  
(SD Card mode) and power of the device connected to the  
[IEEE1394] terminal is turned on, pressing the [CAM/MEDIA]  
selection button displays the playback images of the  
connected device on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
(Only for HD video systems)  
Backup Device  
[INT/EXT] IEEE1394  
Interface Terminal  
Switch  
IEEE1394  
Pressing the same button has no effect if the [IEEE1394]  
connection is not recognized, such as when the power of the  
device connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal is turned off.  
When an SD video system is in use, availability of the  
[IEEE1394] terminal connection cannot be detected in Media  
mode (SD Card mode). Allow the camera recorder to detect  
the [IEEE1394] terminal connection in advance by turning on  
the power of the connected equipment in Camera mode.  
Cable  
Signal Flow  
2 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.  
3 Set the recording video format.  
Perform setting in the [Record Format] menu. Select a video  
format in [System Definition]. (A Page 75)  
for the status display of this mode.  
[HD (MPEG2)] : Performs backup in the HDV format.  
[SD (DV)]  
:
Performs backup in the DV format.  
1 Set the [Record Format] menu according to the input  
Note :  
To back up in the HDV format, be sure to select SP mode for  
the [Frame & Bit Rate] setting.  
2 Press the [CAM/MEDIA] button to set to the IEEE1394  
Input mode.  
4 Perform the following settings on the camera recorder  
3 Set the external device to the playback mode.  
Video images recorded on the external device are displayed  
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
(master device).  
A Set the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 interface terminal switch to  
AEXTB.  
Note :  
B Switch to Camera mode.  
This mode is used for viewing images input to the  
[IEEE1394] terminal from an external device, and not  
intended for recording input images on the camera  
recorder.  
C
Specify how recording to the camera recorder and  
external device is to be performed with the recording  
operation on the camera recorder using [1394 Rec  
Trigger] in the [Others] menu. (  
124  
 
6 Start/Stop recording using the [REC] button on the  
Input of Composite Video Signals  
from External Device (GY-  
camera recorder.  
The EE image of the input signal is output in the SD (DV)  
format from the respective video output terminals.  
Note :  
HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only)  
During recording of external video signals, checking of the  
recording (Clip Review) cannot be performed using the  
[RET] button on the lens.  
This camera recorder is equipped with an AUX input terminal  
on the side for recording composite video signals from an  
external device to an SDHC card.  
Do not touch the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch while recording  
is in progress.  
[GENLOCK/AUX] Switch  
Status Screen Display in AUX Mode  
In the AUX mode, AAUXB is displayed on the status screens  
of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
[GENLOCK/AUX IN]  
Terminal  
AAUXB Display  
720x480  
60i AUX  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
DD  
Memo :  
[Favorites Menu] does not function in AUX mode.  
A 100min  
100min  
B
STBY  
282min  
1
Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.  
Status Screen  
2 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch to AAUXB.  
AAUXB Display  
The [Record Format] menu settings are as follows. (  
CH1  
[System Definition] Item  
[Camera Resolution] Item  
[Frame Rate] Item  
: SD (DV)  
CH2  
: 720 x 480  
: 60i  
DF  
FREE  
3 Set the following items in the [Record Format] menu.  
DD  
720x480  
STBY  
A
min  
60i AUX  
100min  
67.8min  
Select the format for recording to the SDHC card in  
[File Format] (AQuickTimeB or AAVIB).  
123 min  
B
OK  
Enlarged Status Display Screen  
Set the [Aspect Ratio].  
A
16:9  
B
:
:
When the input analog signal is a squeeze signal  
A4:3  
B
All cases other than that stated above  
4 Set [Set Up] in the [A/V Out] menu. (A Page 92)  
A
7.5%  
0.0%  
B
:
:
When input analog signals include setup signals  
A
B
When input analog signals do not include setup signals  
5 Input composite video signals from the external  
device to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
Note :  
Input jitter-free composite video signals.  
Input level : 1.0 0.3 V (p-p)  
125  
 
Input of External  
Synchronizing Signal  
(Genlock)  
1 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.  
2 Set [Genlock Input] in the [Others] menu to ABNCB.  
Memo :  
During input of synchronizing signals from the accessory  
connection terminal (68 pin) at the rear of the camera  
recorder, set to AAdapterB.  
This camera recorder is equipped with a genlock input  
terminal on the side.  
Synchronizing signals can also be input from a KA-M790G  
unit (Multicore Remote Adapter: sold separately) that is  
connected to the accessory connection terminal (68 pin) at  
the rear of the camera recorder.  
The following describes the case of signal input using the  
side [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
Input the external synchronizing signal from the  
[GENLOCK INPUT] terminal, and synchronize the camera  
recorder’s video and playback images with the external  
signal.  
3 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection switch to  
AGENLOCKB. (U model only)  
4 When in the standby or stop mode, input  
synchronizing signals from the SYNC generator to the  
[GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
When the camera recorder’s video is locking to the external  
You can also adjust the H (Horizontal) phase of the camera  
recorder’s video signals with respect to the external  
synchronizing signals on the [Genlock Adjust] screen of the  
[Others] menu. (A Page 96)  
Only horizontal (H) and vertical (V) genlock are supported.  
The camera recorder does not come with an SC (subcarrier)  
lock function.  
synchronizing signal,  
screen.  
After locking to the external synchronizing signal is  
complete, the display disappears and recording can be  
performed.  
ASYNC LOCKINGB appears on the  
Note :  
When the frame rate is set to 30p, 60p, 60i, or 24p in the  
Synchronizing Signal to Use  
SD  
[Frame & Bit Rate] item of the [Record Format] menu, 59.94 Hz  
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization) are input.  
50 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not synchronized.  
When the frame rate is set to 25p, 50p, or 50i in the  
[Frame & Bit Rate] item of the [Record Format] menu, 50 Hz  
synchronizing signals (vertical synchronization) are input.  
59.94 Hz/60 Hz synchronizing signals are not synchronized.  
Do not connect or disconnect the input cable for the  
synchronizing signals during recording or playback.  
If the power is turned ON during input of external  
synchronizing signals, vertical oscillation may occur. This is  
not a malfunction.  
Signals such as VTR playback signals with jitters may not be  
synchronized.  
The camera recorder does not come with an SC (subcarrier)  
lock function. Color flash may occur during switching such as  
when composite signals are used by a switcher.  
synchronizing  
signal  
: BB (Black Burst) signal  
Supports SMPTE170M(RS-170A)-NTSC  
Supports ITU-R BT.470-6 PAL  
HD  
synchronizing  
signal  
: HDTV 3 level synchronizing signal  
Supports SMPTE296M-HD720p  
Supports SMPTE274M-HD1080i  
Note :  
The genlock function can only be used in the Camera  
mode. It is not available in the AUX mode (U model only)  
and Media mode.  
[GENLOCK/AUX] Switch  
(U Model only)  
[GENLOCK/AUX IN] Terminal (U Model)  
[GENLOCK INPUT] Terminal (E Model)  
External Synchronizing  
Signal  
SYNC Signal  
Generator  
External  
Synchronizing  
Signal  
Video Equipment  
126  
 
Phase Items to Synchronize  
The phase items to be synchronized may vary depending on  
the input synchronizing signal and output video signal. (See  
table below)  
Input Sync Signal  
Output Video  
Terminal  
VIDEO  
Tri-sync  
Signal  
BB  
720p  
1080i  
V, F  
Composite  
H, V, F  
H, V, F  
V
V
SD Component  
V, F  
HD Component  
Y/PB/PR 720p  
HD Component  
V
H, V  
V
V
V, F  
H, V, F  
1080i  
SD-SDI  
H, V, F  
V
V
H, V  
V
V, F  
V
HD/SD-SDI HD-SDI 720p  
HD-SDI 1080i  
V, F  
H, V, F  
H : Horizontal phase  
V : Vertical phase  
F : Field phase  
Adjusting the H Phase  
1
Select [Genlock Adjust] in the [Others] menu. (  
2 Select the phase item to adjust in [Genlock Adjust].  
Analog SD H Phase  
Analog HD H Phase  
SD-SDI H Phase  
HD-SDI H Phase  
For adjusting the H phase of SD analog  
signal.  
:
:
:
:
For adjusting the H phase of HD analog  
signal.  
For adjusting the H phase of SD-SDI  
signal.  
For adjusting the H phase of HD-SDI  
signal.  
3 Select a value using the cross-shaped button (JK).  
The H phase of the camera recorder’s video signals is  
adjusted with respect to the external synchronizing signal  
input to the [GENLOCK INPUT] terminal.  
You can alter the setting value for [Analog HD H Phase], [SD-  
SDI H Phase], and [HD-SDI H Phase] in increments of 10 by  
pressing down the cross-shaped button (JK) for 2 seconds  
or longer.  
Memo :  
Adjustment cannot be performed when recording or  
playback is in progress.  
The video image may be disrupted momentarily during  
adjustment. This is not a malfunction.  
127  
 
6 Press the [RET] button on the lens.  
The return video is displayed on the viewfinder and LCD  
monitor while the [RET] button is pressed down.  
Displaying Return Video  
from External Device  
Return video from an external device (switcher, etc.) can be  
displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor of the camera  
recorder.  
[RET] Button  
You can select the destination to input return video in the  
[Return Input] item of the [Others] menu. (A Page 93)  
W
T
R E T  
A
M
I R I S  
Note :  
This function can only be used in the Camera mode. It is  
not available in the AUX mode (U model) and Media mode.  
1 Set the camera recorder to Camera mode.  
2 Set the [GENLOCK/AUX] switch to AAUXB. (U model  
only)  
3 Set the function of the [RET] button on the lens to  
Return Video.  
Set [Camera Function] menu B [Switch Set] menu B  
[LENS RET] to AReturnB. (A Page 79)  
4 Select a destination to input the return video.  
Note :  
Set the [Return Input] item in the [Others] menu. (  
The following displays and operations are invalid when  
return video is displayed. [Zebra], [Skin Area],  
[Spot Meter], [Focus Assist] ([ACCU-Focus] operation),  
[Aspect Marker], [Safety Zone], [Center Mark], and status  
displays.  
Adapter : During input of return video from the KA-M790G  
(Multicore Remote Adapter : sold separately)  
connected to the accessory connector (68-pin)  
at the rear of the camera recorder  
Studio  
: During input of return video from the [STUDIO]  
terminal at the side of the camera recorder  
When return video is displayed, the [VF Display] and  
[LCD Mirror Mode] items in the [LCD/VF] menu become  
invalid, and the camera recorder operates as follows.  
5 Select the aspect ratio for the return video.  
Set the [Return Aspect] item in the [Others] menu. (  
[VF Display]  
: Operates in the AColorB setting.  
[LCD Mirror Mode] : Operates in the ANormalB setting.  
16:9  
: When the return video is a squeeze signal  
4:3  
: When the return video is a 4:3 aspect signal  
(including Letter Box)  
128  
 
Studio System Connection  
Memo :  
For connections between the Camera Remote Control Units, refer to the [INSTRUCTIONS] of the Camera Remote Control  
Unit.  
Studio Viewfinder  
Headset  
VF-HP790G  
Remote Control  
Unit RM-LP25U  
(Beyerdynamic)  
Headset  
(Beyerdynamic)  
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U/  
GY-HM790CHE*/GY-HM790E*  
26Pin Camera  
Cable  
VC-P110U (5m)  
VC-P112U (20m)  
VC-P113U (50m)  
VC-P114U (100m)  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250  
TALLY  
CALL  
FULL AUTO  
BARS  
F1  
F2  
F3  
MENU/SHUTTER  
GAIN  
PAINT WHITE AUTO  
MASTER BLACK  
IRIS  
POWER  
SHUTTER  
GAIN  
STEP  
HIGH  
W.BAL  
B
I
MID  
A
SHUTTER  
PUSH-ON  
VARIABLE  
PUSH-ON  
AUTO  
MANU  
R
B
F4  
MENU  
PRESET  
LOW  
O
INTERCOM  
LEVEL  
DOWN  
UP  
DOWN  
UP  
CLOSE  
OPEN  
Studio Adapter  
KA-790G  
Coaxial cable (for E model)  
Camera Remote Control Unit  
RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*  
Multicore Remote Adapter  
KA-M790G  
Studio Viewfinder  
VF-HP790G  
Headset  
(Beyerdynamic)  
Remote Control  
Unit RM-LP25U  
Headset  
(Beyerdynamic)  
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U/  
GY-HM790CHE*/GY-HM790E*  
26Pin Camera Cable  
VC-P110U (5m)  
VC-P112U (20m)  
VC-P113U (50m)  
VC-P114U (100m)  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250  
TALLY  
CALL  
FULL AUTO  
BARS  
F1  
F2  
F3  
MENU/SHUTTER  
GAIN  
PAINT WHITE AUTO  
MASTER BLACK  
IRIS  
POWER  
SHUTTER  
GAIN  
STEP  
HIGH  
W.BAL  
B
I
MID  
A
SHUTTER  
PUSH-ON  
VARIABLE  
PUSH-ON  
AUTO  
MANU  
R
B
F4  
MENU  
PRESET  
LOW  
O
INTERCOM  
LEVEL  
DOWN  
UP  
DOWN  
UP  
CLOSE  
OPEN  
Studio Adapter  
KA-790G  
HD/SD-SDI  
Component  
Coaxial cable (for E model)  
Camera Remote Control Unit  
RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*  
Multicore Remote Adapter  
KA-M790G  
Studio Viewfinder  
Headset  
(Beyerdynamic)  
VF-HP790G  
Remote Control  
Unit RM-LP25U  
Headset  
(Beyerdynamic)  
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U/  
GY-HM790CHE*/GY-HM790E*  
26Pin Camera Cable  
VC-P110U (5m)  
VC-P112U (20m)  
VC-P113U (50m)  
VC-P114U (100m)  
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-P250  
TALLY  
CALL  
FULL AUTO  
BARS  
F1  
F3  
MENU/SHUTTER  
GAIN  
PAINT WHITE AUTO  
MASTER BLACK  
IRIS  
POWER  
SHUTTER  
GAIN  
STEP  
HIGH  
W.BAL  
B
I
MID  
A
SHUTTER  
PUSH-ON  
VARIABLE  
PUSH-ON  
AUTO  
MANU  
MENU  
R
B
PRESET  
F2  
F4  
LOW  
O
INTERCOM  
LEVEL  
DOWN  
UP  
DOWN  
UP  
CLOSE  
OPEN  
Studio Adapter  
KA-790G  
Coaxial cable (for E model)  
Camera Remote Control Unit  
RM-HP250AU/RM-HP250DE*  
Multicore Remote Adapter  
KA-M790G  
External Synchronizing  
Signal  
HD Switcher  
* Models with an E suffix are for the European market and the UL Listing mark is not applicable.  
129  
 
2 Select [Change] using the cross-shaped button (JK),  
Managing/Editing Clips on  
a PC  
and press the Set button (R).  
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.  
Loading Clips to the PC (USB Connection  
Mode)  
You can load clips to a PC by connecting the camera  
recorder to the PC via the USB port. Doing so enables clips  
stored in the SDHC card to be managed and edited on the  
PC.  
2
Files on the SDHC card can be managed/edited on the  
connected PC in this mode only for USB mass storage class  
devices that are recognized by the said PC as a peripheral  
drive.  
Memo :  
If recording is in progress (including recording on the  
camera recorder and device connected to the IEEE1394  
terminal), the AChange to USB ModeB message appears  
after recording stops.  
Memo :  
Files cannot be written to the SDHC card.  
If playback is in progress, the camera recorder switches to  
USB mode after the file closes automatically, such as  
when playback stops.  
Make sure to manage/edit files recorded in the MP4 file  
format using the (JVC ProHD Clip Manager) PC  
application software in the bundled CD-ROM.  
For details on how to install the application software, refer  
to the [User’s Guide] of the [SxS Memory Card Device  
Driver Software] inside the bundled CD-ROM.  
Disconnecting  
Disable the connection on the PC, then remove the USB  
cable from the camera recorder.  
Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the camera  
recorder to Camera mode.  
1 Connect the camera recorder to the PC using a USB  
cable.  
Memo :  
The procedure for disabling the USB connection varies  
according to the PC in use. For details, refer to the  
instruction manual of the PC.  
A confirmation message AChange to USB ModeB to enable  
the USB connection appears.  
[USB] Terminal  
PC  
130  
   
Precautions for Using the Remote  
Control Unit  
When the switches of the camera recorder and remote  
control unit are operated at the same time, the switch  
operation of the remote control unit takes priority over that  
of the camera recorder.  
Focus and zoom operations cannot be performed using  
the remote control unit.  
Remote Control Unit  
Connection  
The switch functions of the camera recorder can be  
configured using the remote control unit.  
The shutter speed may vary slightly from the value  
displayed on the camera recorder.  
* Remote control units supported : RM-LP25U, RM-LP55U,  
RM-LP57U  
When the frame rate in [Frame & Bit Rate] of the camera  
recorder is set to A24pB, the shutter speed cannot be set  
to A1/60B using the remote control unit. Even if the shutter  
speed is set to A1/60B, the actual speed is A1/48B.  
When the camera recorder is in the Media mode, Auto  
White does not function even when it is operated using  
the remote control unit.  
1
Connect the remote control unit to the camera recorder.  
Connect the remote cable of the remote control unit to the  
[REMOTE] terminal on the terminal area of the camera  
recorder.  
When the H phase is set using a remote control unit, only  
the H phase of the SD signal is activated.  
When setting the H Phase using a remote control unit,  
any value beyond the setting range in the menu of the  
camera recorder cannot be set. (A Page 96)  
[REMOTE] Terminal  
RM-LP25U  
Note :  
Turn off the power of the camera recorder when  
connecting a remote control unit.  
2 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.  
3 Set the operate switch of the remote control unit to  
ON.  
Memo :  
For details on functions that can be operated using the  
remote control unit, refer to [List of Remote Control Unit  
131  
 
3: Available  
-: Not available  
Function  
IRIS CONTROL  
3
Iris F Value  
Display  
3
MASTER BLACK  
TALLY (LED)  
CALL*4  
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
List of Remote Control Unit Functions  
RM-LP25U  
PREVIEW  
AUTO KNEE  
KNEE POINT  
BARS  
TALLY(PGM)*4  
TALLY(PVW)*4  
3: Available  
Function  
-: Not available  
SHUTTER  
NORMAL  
1/100*1, 1/120*2  
1/250  
3
3
3
3
3
3
Rear Input  
Rear Input  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
VARIABLE*6  
SPEED  
-6dB  
RM-LP55U  
3: Available  
-: Not available  
Function  
3
CAM MODE CAM, BARS  
3
3
3
GAIN  
-
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
CONTOUR OFF, ON (LEVEL)  
-3dB  
GAMMA  
OFF, ON (LEVEL)  
0dB  
WHT.BAL.  
MANUAL, PRESET, AUTO1,  
AUTO2, FAW  
3
3dB  
AUTO WHITE  
3
3
6dB  
WHITE PAINT  
9dB  
GAIN  
dB mode 0dB, +3dB*5, +6dB,  
+9dB, +12dB,  
12dB  
3
+15dB*5, +18dB  
15dB  
18dB  
ALC+EEI  
3
3
3
3
3
ALC  
ALC  
PAINT  
R
LOLUX  
VARIABLE  
LEVEL  
B
-
SHUTTER  
NORMAL  
STEP  
1/100*1, 1/120*2,  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, 1/4000*5,  
1/10000*5  
DETAIL  
GAMMA  
BLACK  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
LEVEL  
EEI  
3
3
LEVEL  
STRETCH*3  
NORMAL  
COMPRESS*3  
MANUAL  
PRESET  
FAW  
IRIS  
MANUAL, AUTO  
AUTO IRIS LEVEL, MANUAL  
IRIS LEVEL  
3
ZOOM  
WIDE, STOP, TELE  
NEAR, STOP, FAR  
-
-
3
WHITE BALANCE  
MODE  
FOCUS  
H.PHASE*5  
AW A  
AW B  
WHITE PAINT  
AUTO WHITE  
AUTO BLACK  
BLACK PAINT  
132  
 
RM-LP57U  
3: Available  
-: Not available  
Function  
MODE  
BARS, CAM  
3
3
-
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
H.PHASE*5  
SC COARSE  
SC FINE  
0Њ, 90Њ, 180Њ, 270Њ  
CONTOUR  
OFF, ON  
LEVEL  
0dB  
GAIN  
+6dB  
+9dB  
+12dB  
+18dB  
ALC  
ALC+EEI  
AUTO1  
AUTO2  
FAW  
WHITE BAL  
AUTO WHITE  
R
PAINT  
B
SHUTTER  
OFF  
1/100*1, 1/120*2  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
EEI  
MASTER BLACK  
IRIS  
MANUAL, AUTO  
MANUAL LEVEL  
AI LEVEL  
*1 : Only when the [Frame & Bit Rate] of the camera  
recorder is A60B, A30B, or A24B.  
*2 : Only when the [Frame & Bit Rate] of the camera  
recorder is A50B or A25B.  
*3 : Switches automatically to ANORMALB when both  
[STRETCH] and [COMPRESS] are set to AOffB.  
*4 : Only when [Tally System] in the [Others...] menu is set  
to AStudioB.  
*5 : Only available on RM-LP55U(A).  
*6 : This function may not be operable for some RM-LP25U  
software versions. For more details, please consult  
your nearest JVC dealer. Also, it cannot be controlled  
when the camera recorder is set to the Variable Frame  
Rec mode.  
133  
Others  
Error Displays and Actions  
Alarm displays on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens, as well as the tally lamps and alarm tones are output as follows  
according to the alarm status.  
Memo :  
This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may prevent it from functioning  
properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder again.  
Error Display  
Status  
Action  
Menu Screen  
Thumbnail Screen  
Status Screen  
TURN POWER OFF  
TURN BACK ON  
LATER  
^
System error.  
Turn off the power, and turn it on again.  
If the error persists, consult your nearest JVC  
dealer.  
* The alarm sounds and the tally lamp blinks  
about once every second.  
INCORRECT MEDIA Incorrect Media [***] SDHC card is not supported (a type other than Insert an SDHC card that is compliant with  
Class 6/10). (***: A, B, A/B)  
Class 6/10.  
[***]  
INVALID MEDIA  
[***]  
Invalid Media [***]  
An irrecoverable error is detected.  
SDHC card reading/writing error.  
(Faulty SDHC card) (***: A, B, A/B)  
Replace the SDHC card with a new one.  
FORMATTING  
REQUIRED  
[***]  
Formatting Required SDHC card is not formatted using this camera Format the card using this camera recorder.  
[***]  
recorder. (***: A, B, A/B)  
RESTORE MEDIA  
[***]  
Restore Media [***] SDHC card requires restoring.  
Recording is not successfully completed.  
(Temporary blackout/card removed)  
(***: A, B, A/B)  
Restore the card using this camera recorder.  
NO MEDIA  
^
[REC] button is pressed when an SDHC card Insert an SDHC card. (A Page 31)  
is not inserted.  
^
^
No Media  
No Clips  
No SDHC card is found in Media mode or  
when the thumbnail screen is displayed.  
Insert an SDHC card. (A Page 31)  
No clips are found on the inserted SDHC card Insert an SDHC card that contains playable  
in Media mode or when the thumbnail screen clips. (A Page 31, 61)  
is displayed.  
NO CLIP  
^
^
No viewable clips are found on the card for  
Clip Review.  
Insert an SDHC card that contains clips that  
can be reviewed. (A Page 31, 56)  
REC INHIBITED  
[REC] button is pressed when the write-protect Turn off the write-protect switch of the SDHC  
switch of the SDHC card is set.  
card, or insert a recordable SDHC card.  
CLOSE SLOT  
COVER  
^
Recording to the SDHC card is started with Close the cover of the SDHC card slot.  
the cover of the selected slot left open.  
The cover is opened while recording is in  
progress.  
LOST MEDIA INFO [*]  
Lost Media Info [*]  
Card is removed while recording is in  
progress.  
Restore the card using this camera recorder.  
Card is removed while formatting is in  
progress.  
Card is removed while restoring is in  
progress.  
Card is removed while adding the OK mark.  
Card is removed while writing a setup file.  
Card is removed while deleting a clip. (*: A, B)  
134  
   
Error Display  
Status  
Action  
Menu Screen  
Thumbnail Screen  
Status Screen  
EXT-RECORDER  
POWER ?  
^
Power of the camera recorder is  
turned off while the external device  
connection is detected, and the same connected device.  
connection cannot be detected  
When making use of a connected external  
device, turn on the power supply on the  
several seconds after power is turned  
on again. (Error displays for about 7  
seconds)  
VIDEO FORMAT  
INCORRECT  
^
Video format of the file for Clip  
Review is different from the  
[Frame & Bit Rate] setting of the  
camera recorder.  
Set [Camera Resolution] and  
[Frame & Bit Rate] correctly. (A Page 75)  
IEEE1394 input video format is  
different from the  
[Camera Resolution] and  
[Frame & Bit Rate] settings.  
The video system of the camera  
Set [System Definition] in the  
recorder is not compatible with the [Record Format] menu according to the  
IEEE1394 input signal.  
MEDIA FULL  
^
^
[REC] button is pressed when the  
media in use has no remaining  
space.  
Replace the SDHC card with a new one.  
Remaining space ran out during  
recording.  
FAN MAINTENANCE  
REQUIRED  
Usage time of the fan has  
exceeded 9000 hours.  
Check the fan and replace accordingly. For  
more details, consult your nearest JVC  
dealer.  
Memo :  
You can check the usage time of the fan in the  
[Others] menu  
[Fan Hour]. (  
B
[System Information]  
B
Tally Lamps  
The tally lamps start blinking when the remaining space on the SDHC card is running out during recording, or when the battery  
power is running low.  
Blinking Mode  
Remaining Battery Power/SDHC Card Space  
Blinks slowly  
Battery power is low  
(once every second)  
Remaining recording time on SDHC card is less than 3 minutes  
SDHC card is full  
Blinks quickly  
(4 times a second)  
Error on the camera recorder  
Alarm Tone  
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker and [PHONES] terminal when the battery level is low.  
Alarm tone is output from the monitor speaker and [PHONES] terminal when the SDHC card is full. (Camera mode only)  
Alarm tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.  
Memo :  
[Alarm Level] in the [Others] menu can be used to specify whether alarm tone is to be output, as well as the volume level.  
Alarm tone is not output during recording.  
135  
   
Troubleshooting  
Symptom  
Action  
Is the AC adapter properly connected?  
Power does not turn on.  
Is the battery charged?  
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off? Make sure to wait for  
an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning on the power again.  
Unable to start recording.  
Is the record button lock switch on the handle turned on?  
Is the write-protect switch of the SDHC card turned on? Make sure that the  
write-protect switch is turned off. (A Page 31)  
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode? (Operation mode indicator:  
Lights up in blue/purple) If the operation mode indicator lights up in another  
color, camera images are not output. Use the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button  
to switch to the Camera mode. (A Page 8)  
Camera image is not output on the LCD  
monitor and viewfinder screens.  
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode? (Operation mode indicator:  
Lights up in blue/purple) If the operation mode indicator lights up in another  
color, camera images are not output. Use the [CAM/MEDIA] selection button  
to switch to the Camera mode. (A Page 8)  
Images on the LCD monitor and viewfinder Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor screen and viewfinder.  
screens appear dark or blurred.  
Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to [1/16]?  
Is the iris closed?  
Is the shutter speed setting too high?  
Check the connection of the viewfinder cable.  
Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the [LCD PEAKING +/-] button to  
adjust the contour for the LCD monitor screen and the [VF PEAKING] knob  
for the viewfinder screen. (A Page 28)  
Is the [GENLOCK/AUX] selection switch set to AAUXB?  
Camera images are not output in the AUX mode. (U model)  
Playback does not start after selecting a  
clip thumbnail and pressing the Set  
button (R).  
Is the selected clip a playable clip? Playback is not possible if the clip has a  
different video format setting.  
HDV/DV signals cannot be input.  
Is the camera recorder set to the IEEE1394 Input mode? (Operation mode  
indicator: Lights up in orange)  
Is [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu correctly set?  
No sound during playback.  
Is the currently played clip recorded in the Variable Frame Rec mode?  
The [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2]  
adjustment knob does not work.  
Is the [AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2] switch set to AAUTOB?  
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to AONB?  
SDHC card cannot be initialized (formatted). Is the write-protect switch of the SDHC card turned on? Make sure that the  
write-protect switch is turned off. (A Page 31)  
Battery alarm appears even after loading  
a charged battery.  
Is the battery too old?  
The time code and user’s bit are not  
displayed.  
The time code and user’s bit are not displayed in IEEE1394 Input mode.  
Even in Camera mode or SD Card mode, the time code and user’s bit may not  
be displayed depending to the type of status display.  
Is [TC/UB] of [Status Display] in the [LCD/VF] menu set to AOffB? To display  
the time code and user’s bit, set it to AOnB. (A Page 91)  
136  
 
Symptom  
Action  
The date and time are not displayed.  
The date and time are only displayed on the STATUS 2 and STATUS 3  
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting). (A Page 106, 107)  
No output from the [Y/VIDEO], [PB], and  
[PR] video signal output terminals.  
Is [Output Terminal] in the [A/V Out] menu correctly set? (A Page 92)  
Incorrect display on the viewfinder.  
Is the LCD monitor used with [LCD + VF] in the [LCD/VF] menu set to AOffB?  
IEEE1394 connection between the camera Is the operation mode correctly set? (A Page 8)  
recorder and the external device cannot  
be established (e.g., no image on the  
camera recorder and/or external device).  
Is the [INT/EXT] IEEE1394 interface terminal switch correctly set?  
Is [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu correctly set? (  
Check the connection, such as by removing the IEEE1394 cable and inserting  
it again, or by reconnecting the power.  
When the camera recorder is in the Media Is the power of the device connected to the [IEEE1394] terminal turned ON?  
mode (SD Card mode), pressing the  
[CAM/MEDIA] button does not switch it to  
the IEEE1394 Input mode.  
If the power of the connected device is OFF, the camera recorder does not  
switch to the IEEE1394 Input mode.  
Is [System Definition] in the [Record Format] menu set to  
ASD (DV)B? (A  
When the SD video system is in use, the camera recorder is unable to  
recognize the IEEE1394 connection in the Media mode (SD Card mode).  
Turn ON the power of the IEEE1394-connected device in the Camera mode,  
followed by switching from the Media mode (SD Card mode) to the IEEE1394  
Input mode using the [CAM/MEDIA] button.  
Specifications  
Camera Section  
Image pickup device  
:
1/3" Progressive IT CCD  
Color separation  
prism  
:
:
:
:
:
F1.4, 3-color separation prism  
Internal sync (built-in SSG)  
1/3" bayonet system  
Sync system  
Lens mount  
Optical filter  
Gain  
General  
OFF, 1/4, 1/16  
Power  
:
:
DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17 V)  
Approx. 26 W  
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB,  
Power  
consumption  
ALC  
Electronic shutter  
Variable frame  
:
:
1/6 to 1/10000, EEI  
(During recording [when the camera  
recorder + standard lens + LCD monitor  
are in use])  
10/30-60/30fps, 10/25-50/25fps, 10/24-  
60/24fps  
LCD monitor  
Viewfinder  
:
:
4.3" LCD, 800 x 480  
(WVGA, 410,000 pixels)  
Mass  
GY-HM790CHU  
GY-HM790CHE  
GY-HM790U  
GY-HM790E  
:
:
:
:
Approx. 2.7 kg  
Approx. 2.8 kg  
Approx. 3.7 kg  
Approx. 3.9 kg  
0.45" LCOS, 1.22 megapixels  
(852 x 480 x 3)  
Lens Section (GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)  
Allowable  
operating  
Lens  
:
Canon F/1.6, 14x, f = 4.4-61.6 mm  
(35 mm conversion: 32-448 mm)  
temperature  
:
0 f to 40 f (32 J to 104 J)  
Allowable  
operating  
humidity  
Filter diameter  
:
82 mm  
:
:
30 % RH  
Allowable storage  
temperature  
Storage Section  
-20 f to 60 f (-4 J to 122 J)  
Supported media  
Slots  
:
SDHC (Class 6/10)  
x 2  
:
137  
 
Video/Audio  
Recording time  
:
:
Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SDHC card,  
35 Mbps, VBR mode)  
Video recording file  
format  
QuickTime File Format (For Final Cut  
Pro)  
Time Code  
MP4 File Format (HD only)  
AVI File Format (SD only)  
Time code signal  
LTC input signal  
:
:
Compliant with SMPTE/EBU  
: Video signal  
1.0 Vp-p to 4.0 Vp-p, high impedance  
(unbalanced)  
HD (HQ mode)  
:
:
MPEG-2 Long GOP  
VBR, 35 Mbps (Max) MPEG-2  
MP@HL  
LTC output signal  
:
1.0 Vp-p to 4.0 Vp-p, low impedance  
(unbalanced)  
HD (SP mode)  
MPEG-2 Long GOP  
CBR, 25 Mbps (1440x1080i)/  
19 Mbps (1280x720p) MPEG-2  
MP@H14  
Terminal Section  
SD  
:
:
DV  
[Y/VIDEO], [PB], and [PR] analog video output terminals  
CBR, 25 Mbps (720x480i)/(720x576i)  
Analog composite output (480i or 576i : Downconverted, 4:3/16:9)  
: Audio signal  
Video format  
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit  
:
1.0 V (p-p), 75 K, BNC (unbalanced)  
Component output (720p/1080i)  
Y: 1.0 V (p-p), 75 K  
: NTSC setting  
HD (HQ mode)  
:
:
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 23.98p,  
1440x1080/59.94i (MOV only),  
1280x720/59.94p, 29.97p, 23.98p  
Pb, Pr: 0.7 V (p-p), 75 K, BNCx3  
(unbalanced)  
[HD/SD-SDI] output terminal (480i or 576i : Downconverted 720p/  
1080i : embedded audio), BNC (unbalanced)  
HD (SP mode)  
SD  
:
:
1440x1080/59.94i, 1280x720/59.94p,  
29.97p, 23.98p  
HD-SDI  
SD-SDI  
:
:
Compliant with SMPTE 292 M  
Compliant with SMPTE 259 M  
720x480/59.94i  
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only)  
[AUDIO INPUT 1/2] terminal  
: PAL setting  
[MIC]  
:
-60 dBu, 3 kK, XLR (balanced),  
+48 V output (phantom power supply)  
HD (HQ mode)  
:
:
1920x1080/50i, 25p, 1440x1080/50i  
(MOV only), 1280x720/50p, 25p  
[LINE]  
:
+4 dBu, 10 kK, XLR (balanced)  
HD (SP mode)  
SD  
1440x1080/50i, 1280x720/50p, 25p  
[AUDIO OUTPUT] terminal  
:
720x576/50i  
(GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E only)  
-8 1 dBu (during reference level  
input), 1 kK, RCA x2 (unbalanced)  
[PHONES] terminal  
[REMOTE] terminal  
:
:
3.5 mm mini jack (stereo) x 2  
Accessories  
6-pin JVC remote control unit  
connection  
Viewfinder.....................................................................................1  
Microphone...................................................................................1  
Lens (GY-HM790U/GY-HM790E only)..........................................1  
Instructions...................................................................................1  
CD-ROM.......................................................................................1  
Warranty Card (GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U only).....................1  
[IEEE1394] terminal  
:
:
4-pin  
[USB] terminal  
Mini USB-B type, USB 2.0, miniB, slave  
function (mass storage class) only  
[GENLOCK INPUT]  
terminal  
:
BB signal  
SMPTE 170M(RS-170A) NTSC/ITU-R  
BT.470-6 PAL  
HDTV 3 level synchronizing signal  
SMPTE 296 M/SMPTE 274 M  
BNC  
[AUX INPUT] terminal  
(GY-HM790CHU/GY-  
HM790U only)  
:
:
Composite video signal  
1.0 V (p-p), 75  
K, BNC  
[STUDIO] terminal  
10 pin  
138  
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)  
GY-HM790CHU/GY-HM790U  
90  
95  
40  
(VF MOVE)  
(166)  
231  
(S.PAD  
MOVE)  
30  
209  
311  
210  
GY-HM790CHE/GY-HM790E  
90  
95  
40  
(VF MOVE)  
(166)  
231  
(S.PAD  
MOVE)  
30  
209  
324  
210  
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without prior notice.  
139  
LST1108-001A  
2010 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  

Pioneer DEH P7200HD User Manual
Pelco Car Satellite Radio System C542M B User Manual
Panasonic AVCCAM AG HMC40 User Manual
Nikon 7x50IF HP WP User Manual
MB QUART Mobil PCS 216 User Manual
Magnat Audio Xcess 213 User Manual
Magic Chef MCBC580DBT User Manual
KitchenAid KFP720BW1 User Manual
Kenwood KDC 2021S User Manual
Kenmore KWX 9V User Manual